unfoldingWord_en_tn/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv

459 KiB
Raw Blame History

1BookChapterVerseIDSupportReferenceOrigQuoteOccurrenceGLQuoteOccurrenceNote
21COfrontintroe8ey0# Introduction to 1 Corinthians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians<br><br>1. Opening (1:19)<br>2. Against divisions (1:104:15)<br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:166:20)<br>4. On abstinence (7:140)<br>5. On food (8:111:1)<br>6. On head coverings (11:216)<br>7. On the Lords Supper (11:17-34)<br>8. On spiritual gifts (12:114:40)<br>9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:158)<br>10. On the collection and visits (16:112)<br>11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:1324)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?<br><br>Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?<br><br>1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Pauls First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Corinth like?<br><br>Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.<br><br>### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?<br><br>Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What do “knowledge” and “wisdom” mean in 1 Corinthians?<br><br>### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?<br><br>The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:<br><br>* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)<br>* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)<br>* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)<br><br>The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.<br><br>### What is the meaning of “flesh?”<br><br>Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.<br><br>Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?<br><br>For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.<br><br>* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are Gods.” (6:20)<br>* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.<br>* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)<br>* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”<br>* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
31CO1introud5y0# 1 Corinthians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Opening (1:19)<br> * Greetings and Blessing (1:13)<br> * Praise and Prayer (1:49)<br>2. Against divisions (1:104:15)<br> * Divisions, Leaders, and Baptism (1:1017)<br> * Wisdom, Foolishness, and Boasting (1:1831)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Disunity<br><br>In this chapter, Paul urges the Corinthians to stop dividing up into smaller groups that identify themselves with one specific leader. He mentions some of the leaders, including himself, in [1:12](../01/12.md). The Corinthians probably chose these leaders themselves, since there is no evidence that any of the people mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) were trying to create their own groups. People in the Corinthian church were probably trying to sound wiser or more powerful than other people, so they would choose a group and a leader and say they were better than others. Paul argues against these kinds of divisions first, and then he argues against anyone who tries to sound wiser and more powerful than others. <br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both wisdom and foolishness. These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both power and weakness. These words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors about Christ <br><br>In this chapter, Paul says that “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” ([1:24](../01/24.md)) and that Christ “was made for us wisdom from God, righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption” ([1:30](../01/30.md)). With these two verses, Paul is not saying that Christ is no longer a person and is instead these abstract ideas. Rather, Paul is speaking in this way because Christ and his work for believers include all of these abstract ideas. Christs work is powerful and wise, and gives those who believe in him wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption. For ways to translate these two statements, see the notes on these two verses. <br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul asks many questions in this chapter. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for Gods wisdom and negative words for human wisdom. <br><br>### Using different perspectives<br><br>Sometimes, Paul speaks of God as if God were “foolish” and “weak” ([1:25](../01/25.md)) and as if he chose “foolish” and “weak” things ([1:27](../01/27.md)). Paul does not actually think that God is foolish and weak and chooses foolish and weak things. Rather, he is speaking from the perspective of normal human thinking. What God does, from a human perspective, is “weak” and “foolish.” He makes this clear in several verses. For example, in [1:26](../01/26.md), Paul says that most of the Corinthians were not wise “according to the flesh.” This is Pauls way of saying that they were not wise according to human thinking. If possible translate the times Paul speaks from a human perspective with the same words he uses for “weakness” and “foolishness” when he speaks from Gods perspective. If it is necessary to distinguish these uses, use a word or phrase that explains which perspective Paul is using. He does this himself sometimes, and if it is necessary, you can do it in other places as well. <br><br>### Information presented out of order<br><br>The ULT puts parentheses around [1:16](../01/16.md) because Paul is speaking about whom he baptized, an idea that fits logically with [1:14](../01/14.md) and not as well after [1:15](../01/15.md). Paul has remembered someone else that he baptized, and instead of going back and putting that information in [1:14](../01/14.md), he includes it in [1:16](../01/16.md), interrupting the flow of the argument. If possible, keep [1:16](../01/16.md) where it is, and use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is interrupting his argument. If there is no way to do this in your language, you could move it between [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1:15](../01/15.md). <br>
41CO11m3ddfigs-exclusive0General InformationThroughout this letter the words “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include the Corinthian believers unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive)
51CO11lihgfigs-yousingular<br>0General Information<br>The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Corinthians believers and so are plural unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular)<br>
61CO11o7iefigs-123personΠαῦλος1In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul. I have been” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
71CO11e8j3translate-namesΠαῦλος1PaulHere and throughout the letter, this is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
81CO11qp1nfigs-activepassiveκλητὸς ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ1Sosthenes our brotherIf this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express **called by Christ Jesus {to be} an apostle** in active form. Alternate translation: “whom Christ Jesus called {to be} an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
91CO11qvn5figs-possessionδιὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the will** that **God** has. If it would be misunderstood in your language that this phrase refers to what God wills, you could express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because God desired this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
101CO11xfbofigs-explicitκαὶ Σωσθένης1This phrase means that Sosthenes is with Paul, and Paul writes the letter for both of them. It does not mean that Sosthenes was the scribe who wrote the letter down. It also does not mean that Sosthenes dictated the letter with Paul, since Paul uses the first person singular more than the first person plural in the letter. If there is a way in your language to indicate that Paul writes in behalf of Sosthenes, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “and I write in behalf of Sosthenes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit)
111CO11n9zvtranslate-namesΣωσθένης1This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
121CO12r9kgfigs-123personτῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ…τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ1to the church of God at CorinthIn this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you who are members of the church of God at Corinth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
131CO12e75pfigs-activepassiveἡγιασμένοις1those who have been sanctified in Christ JesusIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **having been sanctified** in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God having sanctified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
141CO12lp42figs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ1Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
151CO12e8jwfigs-activepassiveκλητοῖς ἁγίοις1who are called to be saintsIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **called {to be} saints** in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “whom God has called {to be} saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
161CO12nz5sfigs-hyperboleἐν παντὶ τόπῳ1Here, Paul describes all believers as if they were **in every place**. He speaks this way to emphasize that believers can be found in many countries, towns, and villages. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate that believers are found in many places around the world. Alternate translation: “in many places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
171CO12l21mfigs-idiomἐπικαλουμένοις τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν1those who call on the name of our Lord Jesus Christ“Calling on the name of” someone is an idiom that refers to worshiping and praying to that person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who pray to and venerate our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
181CO12l9rqfigs-ellipsisαὐτῶν καὶ ἡμῶν1their Lord and oursIn the phrase, Paul has left out words that may be needed in some languages to make a complete thought. If you cannot leave out these words in your language, you could supply words such as “who is” and “Lord” to make a complete thought. Alternate translation: “who is Lord over them and us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
191CO13gc2ctranslate-blessing<br>χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1General Information:After stating his name and the name of the person to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing for the Corinthians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah” or “I pray that grace and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah will always be with you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing)
201CO14zd7lfigs-hyperboleπάντοτε1Here, **always** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express how often he prays for the Corinthians. If **always** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “frequently” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole)
211CO14qoagfigs-distinguishτῷ Θεῷ μου1When Paul speaks of **my God**, he does not mean that this is a different **God** than the one the Corinthians believe in. Rather, he simply wishes to state that this is **God** is his God. If **my God** in your translation sounds like it makes a distinction between Pauls God and the Corinthians God, you could translate with a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “to our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
221CO14t16dfigs-activepassiveτῇ δοθείσῃ<br>1because of the grace of God that was given to you in Christ JesusIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **that was given** in active form with “God” or “he” as the subject. Alternate translation: “that he gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
231CO14jjtnfigs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ1Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains (1) the means by which God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
241CO15nl9zgrammar-connect-words-phrasesὅτι1The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of “the grace of God that was given” in [1:4](../01/04.md). Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
251CO15qsc9παντὶ1Alternate translation: “every way”
261CO15js7ffigs-metaphorἐπλουτίσθητε1you have been made rich in himHere, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians had received a lot of money **in him**. With this language of being **rich**, Paul means that the Corinthians have received more than they need, and [1:7](../01/07.md) shows that what they have received are spiritual blessings and gifts. If being **made rich** would be misunderstood by your readers, you could: (1) express this idea with a phrase that refers to how much God has given them. Alternate translation: “you were given many gifts” (2) clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual riches. Alternate translation: “you were made spiritually rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
271CO15kaiefigs-activepassiveἐπλουτίσθητε1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express **you were made rich** in active form, with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has made you rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
281CO15n9wnwriting-pronounsἐν αὐτῷ1The word translated **him** refers to Jesus, since God the Father is the one who makes the Corinthians rich. If **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the words “Christ” or “Christ Jesus” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
291CO15j48tfigs-abstractnounsπαντὶ λόγῳ1in all speechIf you cannot use this form in your language, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **word** with a verb. Alternate translation: “everything you speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
301CO15qy8cfigs-abstractnounsπάσῃ γνώσει1all knowledgeIf you cannot use this form in your language, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb. Alternate translation: “everything you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
311CO16ef38grammar-connect-words-phrasesκαθὼς1The word translated **just as** could introduce: (1) the reason why the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “which is due to how” (2) a comparison that illustrates how the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “in the same way that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
321CO16ub5rfigs-exmetaphorτὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη1In this verse, Paul speaks as if what he told the Corinthians about Christ was testimony he gave as a witness in a court of law. This testimony has been **confirmed**, just as if other evidence proved to the judge that his **testimony** was accurate. With this metaphor, he reminds the Corinthians that they have believed the message about Christ and that it is now an important part of their lives. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “our message about Christ has been firmly founded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
331CO16h9zkfigs-possessionτὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the testimony about Christ has been confirmed as true among youHere, Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **testimony** that concerns **Christ**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit that **Christ** is the content of the **testimony**. Alternate translation: “the testimony about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
341CO16tfo3figs-activepassiveτὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form with “God” as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has confirmed the testimony of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
351CO17t2hdgrammar-connect-words-phrasesὥστε1ThereforeThe word translated **so that** could introduce: (1) a result from “being made rich” in [1:5](../01/05.md) and from the confirmation of the “testimony” in [1:6](../01/06.md). Alternate translation: “God has made you rich and confirmed our testimony so that” (2) a result from just the confirmation in [1:6](../01/06.md). Alternate translation: “God confirmed our testimony among you so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
361CO17p5y6figs-litotesὑμᾶς μὴ ὑστερεῖσθαι ἐν μηδενὶ χαρίσματι1you lack no spiritual giftHere, Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **lack**, to express a strong positive meaning. He means that the Corinthians have every spiritual gift that God gives. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea in positive form. Alternate translation: “you have every gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
371CO17ymphgrammar-connect-time-simultaneousἀπεκδεχομένους1The word translated **eagerly waiting for** introduces something that happens at the same time as not lacking **in any gift**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “while you eagerly wait for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
381CO17fe4qfigs-possessionτὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1the revelation of our Lord Jesus ChristHere, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **revelation** whose content is **our Lord Jesus Christ**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit by translating the phrase with a verb with “God” or **our Lord Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God to reveal our Lord Jesus Christ” or “our Lord Jesus Christ to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
391CO17o145figs-explicitτὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1In this context, it is clear that Paul does not simply mean that knowledge about **our Lord Jesus Christ** will be revealed. Rather, he means that **our Lord Jesus Christ** himself will return to earth. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “return” to make this idea clear. Alternate translation: “the return of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
401CO18cqpkwriting-pronounsὃς1This pronoun could refer to: (1) God, who is the implied subject of all the verbs in this section. Alternate translation: “It is God who” (2) Jesus, which is the closest name. Alternate translation: “It is Jesus who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
411CO18uscitranslate-unknownκαὶ βεβαιώσει ὑμᾶς1The word translated **confirm** is the same word that Paul used in [1:6](../01/06.md), also translated “confirmed.” Paul uses the word **also** to remind the reader that he has already used **confirmed**. If possible, translate **confirmed** as you did in [1:6](../01/06.md). Just as there, here it refers to something or someone that is proved to be true or accurate. In this case, it means that God will make the Corinthians faith true **to the end**. Alternate translation: “will also firmly found your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
421CO18qtpqfigs-idiomἕως τέλους1The phrase translated **to the end** means that some activity or state will continue until a definable point in the future. Here, it means that God will **confirm** the Corinthians until their earthly lives end. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “until your race is run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
431CO18pif5grammar-connect-logic-resultἀνεγκλήτους1you will be blamelessThe word translated **blameless** gives the result of God confirming them to the end. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “so that you will be blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
441CO19hp30figs-activepassiveδι’ οὗ ἐκλήθητε1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “who called you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
451CO19u2z0figs-possession<br>εἰς κοινωνίαν τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **fellowship** that is with **his Son**. If this form would be misunderstood in you language, you could (1) use a word such as “with” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “into fellowship with his Son” (2) translate **fellowship** with a verb such as “share in” or “commune with.” Alternate translation: “to commune with his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
461CO19kx3zguidelines-sonofgodprinciplesτοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ1his Son**Son** is an important title for Jesus and describes his relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
471CO110huz1grammar-connect-words-phrasesπαρακαλῶ δὲ1The word translated **now** indicates the beginning of a new section. Paul transitions from giving thanks to appealing to the Corinthians to avoid divisions. You could: (1) leave this word untranslated, and show the shift in topic by starting a new paragraph. Alternate translation: “I urge” (2) use a word or phrase that indicates the beginning of a new section. Alternate translation: “Next, I urge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
481CO110u1u1figs-infostructureπαρακαλῶ δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1In this sentence, **I urge you** is far away from what Paul is urging. If it would be clearer in your language, you could move **I urge you** so that it comes right before **that you all speak**. Alternate translation: “Now brothers, through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, I urge you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
491CO110k7gwfigs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί1brothersAlthough the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
501CO110sw54figs-metonymyδιὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1through the name of our Lord Jesus ChristHere, Paul uses the **name** of Jesus to refer to the authority of Jesus. With this language, he reminds the Corinthians that he is an apostle with authority from Jesus. If the meaning of **name** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “on behalf of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
511CO110u4y2figs-idiomτὸ αὐτὸ λέγητε πάντες1that you all agreeIn this language, to **speak the same thing** is an idiom that means that everyone is in agreement, not only in what they speak but also in what they believe and set as goals. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you all see eye to eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
521CO110j75ctranslate-unknownσχίσματα1that there be no divisions among youThe word translated **divisions** refers to when one group splits into multiple different groups because they have different leaders, beliefs, or opinions. If this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable noun or a short phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “opposing parties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
531CO110tjkgtranslate-unknownκατηρτισμένοι1The word translated **joined together** refers to putting something into its proper position or state, often returning it to that state. Here, then, it refers to restoring the community to the unity it had and is supposed to have. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “restored to your previous unity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
541CO110emt2figs-abstractnounsἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοῒ καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ γνώμῃ1be joined together with the same mind and by the same purposeIf you cannot this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **mind** and **purpose** with verbs such as “think” and “decide” or “choose.” Alternate translation: “by thinking the same things and by choosing the same things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
551CO111dtspgrammar-connect-logic-resultγάρ1The word translated **for** introduces the reason why Paul is urging them to become united together. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase to express the idea. Alternate translation: “I speak this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
561CO111taynfigs-activepassiveἐδηλώθη…μοι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί μου, ὑπὸ τῶν Χλόης1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could write this sentence in active form. Alternate translation: “those of Chloe have made it clear to me concerning you, my brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
571CO111ur84figs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί μου1Although the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
581CO111e8jbfigs-explicitτῶν Χλόης1Chloes people**those of Chloe** refers to people who are connected to Chloe and probably live in her house or work for her. Paul does not tell us whether they are family members, slaves, or employees. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that these people are related to or dependent on Chloe. Alternate translation: “people connected to Chloe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
591CO111fd71translate-namesΧλόης1This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
601CO111vbe6translate-unknownἔριδες ἐν ὑμῖν εἰσιν1there are factions among youThe word translated **factions** refers to quarrels or strife within a community. These quarrels or fights are not physical but verbal. If possible, use a word that refers to verbal conflict or express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you have verbal fights with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
611CO112umbxgrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Paul uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a further explanation of what he started talking about in [1:11](../01/11.md). If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
621CO112tsn6figs-idiom λέγω…τοῦτο1Here, Paul uses the phrase **I say this** to explain what he meant in the previous verse when he mentioned “factions” ([1:11](../01/11.md)). If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for explaining what has already been said or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what I mean is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
631CO112a4lofigs-explicitinfoτοῦτο, ὅτι1Having both **this** and **that** in this sentence may be redundant in your language. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a simpler way to introduce what Paul wants to “say.” Alternate translation: “that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
641CO112wf0nfigs-hyperboleἕκαστος ὑμῶν λέγει1Here, Paul uses **each of them** to emphasize that many individuals within the Corinthian congregation are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that each person says all four of these things. He also does not mean that every single person in the church is making these kinds of claims. Finally, he does not mean that these are the only four claims that they are making. If the form that Paul uses would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that singles out many individuals within a group, and you could add a phrase that indicates that these are examples of what they are saying. Alternate translation: “people in your group say are saying things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
651CO112vpymtranslate-namesΠαύλου…Ἀπολλῶ…Κηφᾶ1These are the names of three men. Cephas is another name for Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
661CO112bfd0figs-quotationsἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that you are of Paul, or you are of Apollos, or you are of Cephas, or you are of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
671CO112a57rfigs-possessionἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ1Each one of you saysHere, Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that these people claim to be part of a specific leaders group. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “I follow Paul, or I follow Apollos, or I follow Cephas, or I follow Christ.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
681CO113iam2figs-123personμὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε1In this verse, Paul speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If this use of **Paul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul is naming himself. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, was not crucified for you, was I? Or were you baptized in my name, that of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
691CO113wf6rfigs-rquestionμεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?1Is Christ divided?Paul asks if **Christ** has **been divided**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their behavior is. If the meaning of this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Christ has certainly not been divided!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
701CO113w175figs-activepassiveμεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “Have they divided Christ?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
711CO113aw2rfigs-metaphorμεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός1Here, Paul speaks as if **Christ** could be **divided** into pieces and given to different groups. He speaks this way because he identifies the church with the body of Christ. If the church is divided into groups, then the body of Christ has been divided up as well. However, it is absurd to think that Christs body has been cut up into pieces, so it is also absurd to divide the church into pieces. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Has Christs own body been divided, just as your church has been divided?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
721CO113g5qhfigs-rquestionμὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν1Was Paul crucified for you?Paul asks if **Paul was not crucified**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Paul was certainly not crucified for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
731CO113lqsyfigs-activepassiveμὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “They did not crucify Paul for you, did they?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
741CO113tb2ifigs-rquestionἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?1Were you baptized in the name of Paul?Paul asks if they **were baptized in the name of Paul**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “You were certainly not baptized in the name of Paul!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
751CO113tii7figs-activepassiveἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Or did they baptize you in the name of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
761CO113zi1yfigs-metonymyεἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου1in the name of PaulHere, Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used the **name of Paul**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. Instead, he implicitly asserts that they belong to God, whose name would have been used when they were baptized. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the authority of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
771CO114hhh8grammar-connect-exceptionsοὐδένα ὑμῶν ἐβάπτισα εἰ μὴ1none of you, exceptIf it would appear in your language that Paul is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword the sentence to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I baptized only two of you: Crispus and Gaius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
781CO114vqq6translate-namesΚρίσπον…Γάϊον1CrispusThese are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
791CO115hv3mgrammar-connect-logic-goalἵνα1This was so that no one would say that you were baptized into my nameThe word translated **so that** introduces a purpose or result. In this case, it introduces what results from Paul not baptizing many of the Corinthians. Because he did not baptize almost any of them, they cannot say that they were baptized into his name. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates result, and you could specify that it is the result of Paul not baptizing many of them. Alternate translation: “The result is that” or “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
801CO115dwdvfigs-activepassiveεἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα ἐβαπτίσθητε1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could state this in active form with an indefinite subject or with Paul as the subject. Alternate translation: “someone baptized you into my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
811CO115u8f6figs-metonymyεἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα1Here, just as in [1:13](../01/13.md), Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used Pauls **name**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
821CO116mq74grammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word translated **Now** interrupts the argument and reintroduces the theme of [1:14](../01/14.md), which is about whom Paul baptized. If this transition would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using punctuation that indicates a brief aside or parenthesis, or you could use a phrase that introduces when someone remembers something. Alternate translation: “Speaking of baptizing, I remember that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
831CO116ed59translate-namesΣτεφανᾶ1the household of StephanasThis is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
841CO116nlzntranslate-unknownοὐκ οἶδα εἴ τινα ἄλλον ἐβάπτισα1This statement could be more or less confident about how many people Paul baptized. It could be: (1) relatively confident that Paul has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I think that this is everyone that I baptized” (2) less confident that Paul has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I do not remember if I baptized any others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
851CO116qbjffigs-hypoεἴ1Paul here uses the condition introduced by **if** because he wishes to acknowledge that he thinks he has mentioned everyone that he baptized, but he is not sure. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that expresses uncertainty. Alternate translation: “whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
861CO117jkfjgrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1The word translated **For** introduces an explanation for why Paul has baptized so few people. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, and you could clarify that it explains how little he baptizes. Alternate translation: “I only baptized a few people because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
871CO117ga5kfigs-infostructureοὐ…ἀπέστειλέν με Χριστὸς βαπτίζειν, ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι1If putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them and introduce **not with wise speech** by repeating **proclaim**. Alternate translation: “Christ sent me to proclaim the gospel, not to baptize. I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
881CO117tg7ifigs-ellipsisἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι1Christ did not send me to baptizeIn this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat the “sending” language. Alternate translation: “but he sent me to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
891CO117p3cffigs-ellipsisοὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ λόγου1In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat the “proclaiming” language. Alternate translation: “I do not proclaim it with wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
901CO117u60sgrammar-connect-logic-goalἵνα1The word translated **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul does not use “wise speech.” Here, you could use a word or phrase that normally indicates purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
911CO117zn1nfigs-metaphorμὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ1clever speech … the cross of Christ should not be emptied of its powerHere, Paul speaks as if the **cross of Christ** was a container that was full of power that he does not wish to empty of that power. By this, he means that he does not want to take away the power that the cross and the message about it have. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively, including the idea of power. Alternate translation: “the cross of Christ would not lose its power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
921CO117qdyjfigs-activepassiveμὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this idea in active form, with Paul as the subject. Alternate translation: “I would not empty the cross of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
931CO118j7cwgrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Connecting Statement:The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of the last part of [1:17](../01/17.md). In this verse, then, Paul explains further why he does not use wise speech. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, and you could briefly restate what Paul is explaining. Alternate translation: “I speak in this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
941CO118fq4xfigs-possessionὁ λόγος…ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ1the message about the crossHere, Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **word** that is about **the cross**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the **cross** is the content of the **word**. Alternate translation: “the word about the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
951CO118utr3figs-metonymyτοῦ σταυροῦ1Here, the word **cross** stands for the event in which Jesus died on the cross. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could include Jesus death in your translation. Alternate translation: “of Jesuss death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
961CO118p4wbfigs-abstractnounsμωρία ἐστίν1is foolishnessIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **foolishness** by translating it as an adjective such as “foolish.” Alternate translation: “seems foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
971CO118lq5zfigs-activepassiveτοῖς…ἀπολλυμένοις1to those who are dyingIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this in active form, with: (1) themselves as the subject. Alternate translation: “to those who will experience destruction” (2) God as the subject. Alternate translation: “to those whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
981CO118ao4mfigs-activepassiveτοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this clause in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “but to us whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
991CO118m66wfigs-distinguishτοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν1The description **who are being saved** distinguishes **us** from anyone else. It is not just adding information. Use a form in your language that shows that this is a distinguishing phrase. Alternate translation: “but to us, that is, the ones who are being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1001CO118ji74figs-possessionδύναμις Θεοῦ ἐστιν1it is the power of GodHere, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God working in power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1011CO119fdhkgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγάρ1Here, the word translated **For** introduces Pauls evidence that what he said in [1:18](../01/18.md) is true. You could use a word that introduces evidence for a claim or leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1021CO119wx5xfigs-activepassiveγέγραπται1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express this in active form, with: (1) the scripture or scripture author as the subject. Alternate translation: “Isaiah has written” (2) God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1031CO119tc6nfigs-quotationsἀπολῶ τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν, καὶ τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν ἀθετήσω1I will frustrate the understanding of the intelligentIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this direct quote as an indirect quote, specifying that God is the subject and including an introductory word such as “that.” Alternate translation: “that God will destroy the wisdom of the wise, and he will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1041CO119kzb0figs-possessionτὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν…τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν1In both of these clauses, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** or **understanding** that belongs to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could indicate that **wisdom** and **understanding** belong to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that the wise have … the understanding that the intelligent have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1051CO119gft6figs-nominaladjτῶν σοφῶν…τῶν συνετῶν1Paul is using the adjectives **wise** and **intelligent** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the people who are wise … of the people who are intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1061CO119pa5ntranslate-unknownτῶν συνετῶν1The word translated **intelligent** describes someone who is good at figuring problems out, understanding new ideas, and making smart decisions. Use a word in your language that gets this general idea across. Alternate translation: “of the smart” or “of the clever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1071CO120m6tffigs-rquestionποῦ σοφός? ποῦ γραμματεύς? ποῦ συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου? 1Where is the wise person? Where is the scholar? Where is the debater of this world?With these questions, Paul is not actually asking about the location of certain people. Rather, he is suggesting to the Corinthians that these kinds of people cannot be found. If these questions would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with statements that: (1) assert that these people do not actually have real wisdom, knowledge, or skill. Alternate translation: “The wise person does not really have wisdom. The scholar does not really know much. The debater of this age is not really good at arguing” (2) assert that these people do not exist. Alternate translation: “There is no wise person. There is no scholar. There is no debater of this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1081CO120h0qafigs-genericnounσοφός…γραμματεύς…συνζητητὴς1Paul uses these singular nouns to identify types of people, but he does not mean just one **wise person**, **scholar**, or **debater**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that identifies a type of person, or you could translate these nouns in plural form. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who has wisdom … the kind of person who is a scholar … the kind of person who is a debater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1091CO120mzxxfigs-possessionσυνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **debater** who is part of **this age**. In fact, Paul may mean that the **wise person** and the **scholar** also belong to **this age**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the debater, who belongs in this age” or “the debater? All these kinds of people belong to this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1101CO120u5j5translate-unknownσυνζητητὴς1the debaterThe word translated **debater** refers to someone who spends much of their time arguing about beliefs, values, or actions. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase or a term that expresses this idea better. Alternate translation: “the disputant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1111CO120a7zlfigs-rquestionοὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου?1Has not God turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement. Alternate translation: “ God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1121CO120y5wxfigs-possessionτὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that seems wise according to the standard of this **world**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that this world values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1131CO121cihggrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of how God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness ([1:20](../01/20.md)). You could use a word that introduces an explanation in your language or a short phrase that identifies that this verse explains the previous verse. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1141CO121eaujgrammar-connect-logic-resultἐπειδὴ…οὐκ ἔγνω ὁ κόσμος διὰ τῆς σοφίας τὸν Θεόν, εὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεὸς1The word translated **since** introduces the reason for the second half of the verse, beginning with **God was pleased**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this more explicit or break the two pieces into two sentences and use a transition word that indicates result. Alternate translation: “because … the world did not know God through wisdom, therefore God was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1151CO121tnezfigs-possessionἐν τῇ σοφίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that **God** uses when he makes decisions or acts. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by adding “plans” or “thinking” and translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “in Gods wise plan” or ”in Gods wise thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1161CO121odykfigs-synecdocheὁ κόσμος1Here, Paul uses the word translated **world** to refer to the humans that are part of the **world**. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate **world** with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not believe in Christ, or you could use a phrase like “people of the world.” Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1171CO121d7xwfigs-possessionτῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος1those who believeHere, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **preaching** that is characterized by **foolishness**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **foolishness** as an adjective describing **the preaching** or the content of **the preaching**. Alternate translation: “the foolish preaching” or “the foolish message that we preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1181CO121lkk1figs-ironyτῆς μωρίας1Paul describes the **preaching** as **foolishness**. He does not actually think his message is foolish. Instead, he speaks from the perspective of **the world** and its **wisdom**, because the message is foolish to **the world**. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person's perspective. Alternate translation: “the so-called foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1191CO122j8nhgrammar-connect-words-phrasesἐπειδὴ καὶ1The word translated **For** sets up the contrast between this verse and what Paul preaches in the next verse. If your language has a way to begin a contrast, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “It is indeed true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1201CO122e1syfigs-hyperboleἸουδαῖοι…Ἕλληνες1By using the words translated **Jews** and **Greeks**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Greek person does these things. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Greek. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that not all **Jews** and **Greeks** are meant. Alternate translation: “most Jews … most Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1211CO122t32rtranslate-unknownἝλληνες1The word translated **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1221CO123q8sjgrammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1Here, Paul continues the contrast he set up in [1:22](../01/22.md). Jews seek signs, and Greeks seek wisdom, but Paul and those like him proclaim that the Messiah was crucified. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates a strong contrast between behavior or beliefs. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1231CO123v9fafigs-exclusiveἡμεῖς1General Information:Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the Gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1241CO123ntu3figs-activepassiveΧριστὸν ἐσταυρωμένον1Christ crucifiedIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could state this in active form, with: (1) **Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “that Christ laid down his life on the cross” (2) an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “that they crucified Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1251CO123krw3figs-metaphorσκάνδαλον1a stumbling blockPaul uses the word translated **stumbling block** to indicate that the message about “Christ crucified” causes offense or repulses many Jews. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “a repulsive concept” or “an unacceptable idea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1261CO123n6u2figs-hyperboleἸουδαίοις…ἔθνεσιν1By using the words translated **Jews** and **Gentiles**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Gentile person responds to the Gospel in these ways. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Gentile. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that not all **Jews** and **Gentiles** are meant. Alternate translation: “to most Jews … to most Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1271CO124xgw1grammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1Here, Paul uses the word translated **But** to contrast **those who are called** and the “Jews” and “Gentiles” in [1:23](../01/23.md). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts people and their thinking. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1281CO124i7l4figs-infostructureαὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς, Ἰουδαίοις τε καὶ Ἕλλησιν, Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν1Paul here puts the people he is talking about first before he makes a statement about them. If this is unnatural in your language, you could: (1) phrase the sentence so that **those who are called** is the subject of the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, know that Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God” (2) move **to those who are called** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1291CO124h7iwfigs-123personαὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς1to those whom God has calledPaul uses the third person to speak about those whom God has called because he is speaking of the group as a category in comparison with Jews who find the Gospel a stumbling block and Gentiles who find the Gospel to be foolish. He does not use the third person because he excludes himself or the Corinthians from this category. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with the first person. Alternate translation: “to those of us who are called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1301CO124apppfigs-activepassiveτοῖς κλητοῖς1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could write this in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “whom God has called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1311CO124pt5xtranslate-unknownἝλλησιν1The word translated **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1321CO124hu1sfigs-metonymyΧριστὸν1Christ as the power and the wisdom of GodHere, the word **Christ** could refer to: (1) the message about the work of Christ. Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (2) the work of Christ, especially his death. Alternate translation: “Christs work” or “Christs death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1331CO124w9vmfigs-possessionΘεοῦ δύναμιν1the power … of GodHere, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God acting powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1341CO124p1hufigs-possessionΘεοῦ σοφίαν1the wisdom of GodHere, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **wisdom**. Alternate translation: “wisdom from God” or “God giving wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1351CO125fst8grammar-connect-logic-resultὅτι1With the word translated **For**, Paul introduces the reason why the seemingly foolish message about Christ is power and wisdom ([1:24](../01/24.md)). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that introduces a reason or a short phrase that connects this verse to the previous verse or verses. Alternate translation: “God works through foolishness because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1361CO125h9hhfigs-ironyτὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ1the foolishness of God is wiser than people, and the weakness of God is stronger than peoplePaul describes God as having **foolishness** and **weakness**. He does not actually think that God is weak and foolish, but he is speaking from the perspective of the world and its wisdom. From the perspective of the world, Pauls God is indeed foolish and weak. What Paul means to say is that what the world sees as **foolishness** and **weakness** is still **wiser** and **stronger** than anything that humans have to offer. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person's perspective. Alternate translation: “the apparent foolishness of God … the apparent weakness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1371CO125esc9figs-gendernotationsτῶν ἀνθρώπων-1The words translated **men** in both places in this verse do not refer just to male people. Rather, Paul means any human of any sex. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use both genders or a gender-neutral word. Alternate translation: “women and men … women and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1381CO125jydyfigs-possessionτὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐστίν1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **foolishness** that comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **foolishness**. Alternate translation: “the foolish things that God does are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1391CO125uciwfigs-ellipsisσοφώτερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐστίν1Paul does not say everything that is needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If the sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the wisdom.” Alternate translation: “is wiser than the wisdom of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1401CO125gnpefigs-possessionτὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weakness** that comes from **God**. If it this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **weakness**. Alternate translation: “the weak things that God does {are}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1411CO125i7plfigs-ellipsisἰσχυρότερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων1Paul does not say everything that is needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the strength.” Alternate translation: “stronger than the strength of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1421CO126je03grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word translated **For** introduces proof for or examples of what Paul has claimed so far about God choosing to work through foolishness and weakness. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces examples or support. Alternate translation: “For instance,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1431CO126c8sftranslate-unknownτὴν κλῆσιν ὑμῶν1Here, the word translated **calling** primarily to who they were at the time of their **calling**. It does not primarily refer to Gods act in **calling** them. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood language, you can emphasize this aspect in your translation. Alternate translation: “who you were at your calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1441CO126xq6bfigs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί1Here, the word translated **brothers** does not just refer to men but to people of any sex. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) use a non-gendered word. Alternate translation: “siblings” (2) use words for both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1451CO126w6l1figs-litotesοὐ πολλοὶ-1Not many of youHere, Paul uses a form that can more easily be stated in inverse form in many languages. If: (1) your language would most naturally put **not** with the verb instead of **many**, you could do so here. Alternate translation: “many {were} not … many {were} not … and many {were} not” (2) your language would most naturally use a word that indicates a small number of people here, you could use it without **not**. Alternate translation: “few … few … and few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1461CO126unigwriting-pronounsοὐ πολλοὶ-1While Paul does not explicitly state that **not many** refers to the Corinthians, he is referring to the Corinthians when he says **not many**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could insert “you.” Alternate translation: “not many of you … not many of you … and not many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1471CO126camjfigs-infostructureοὐ πολλοὶ σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα, οὐ πολλοὶ δυνατοί, οὐ πολλοὶ εὐγενεῖς1Paul here uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to clarify what he means by **wise**, **powerful**, and **of noble birth**, not just **wise**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could move **according to the flesh** so that it is clear that it modifies all three of these statements. Alternate translation: “according to the flesh, not many {were} wise, not many {were} powerful, and not many {were} of noble birth (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1481CO126pws2figs-idiomκατὰ σάρκα1wise according to the fleshHere, Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If the meaning of thsi phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idiom **according to the flesh** with a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1491CO127qjvdgrammar-connect-logic-contrastἀλλὰ1Here, Paul introduces a contrast. hH is contrasting **God chose the foolish things** with what a person might expect about how God would treat foolish and weak people like the Corinthians. He is not contrasting how **God chose the foolish things** with the statements in the previous verse about the foolishness and weakness of the Corinthians. If this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul writes **But** to contrast with what a person might expect about God. Alternate translation: “Despite what might be expected,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1501CO127qv5lfigs-parallelismτοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ…τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ2God chose … wise. God chose … strongHere, Paul repeats the exact same words: **God chose … in order that he might shame**. He does this because repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than just one example in his culture. If possible, translate these words the same way in both parts of the sentence to preserve the parallelism. If it is necessary, you could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing, which is what Paul intended. Alternate translation: “God chose … of the world in order that he might shame … he chose … of the world to shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1511CO127r4lyfigs-possessionτὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου…τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου1Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the **foolish things** and **weak things** are only **foolish** and **weak** from the perspective of the **world**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1521CO127gdobfigs-synecdocheτοῦ κόσμου-1When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people … of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1531CO127iwhogrammar-connect-logic-goalἵνα-1Here, the word translated **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “so that … so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “with the result that … with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1541CO127vtzxfigs-nominaladjτοὺς σοφούς…τὰ ἰσχυρά1Paul uses the adjective **wise** to describe a group of people, and he uses the adjective **strong** to describe a group of people and things. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these two adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are wise … people and things which are strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1551CO128tqxgfigs-parallelismτοῦ κόσμου…ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός,…ἵνα1In this verse, Paul repeats many of the words from the parallel parts of previous verse. He does this because repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than just one example in his culture. If possible, translate these words the same way that you translated them in [1:27](../01/27.md). If it is necessary, you could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing, which is what Paul intended. Alternate translation: “he chose … of the world … in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1561CO128k3kdtranslate-unknownτὰ ἀγενῆ1what is low and despisedThe word translated **base things** is the opposite of the word translated “of noble birth” in [1:26](../01/26.md). Paul uses it to refer to things and people that were not considered important or powerful in his culture. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people and things that have low status or low importance. Alternate translation: “the marginalized things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1571CO128d5patranslate-unknownτὰ ἐξουθενημένα1While the word translated **base things** refers to a person's status or a thing's status, the word translated **despised things** refers to how people treat other people or things that have low status. Usually, people badly treat others whom they consider to be of lower status, ignoring them or mocking them. That is what Paul means when he says **despised**. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how people treat others of lower status badly. Alternate translation: “the scorned things” or “the things people treat with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1581CO128wir6figs-possessionτὰ ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου καὶ τὰ ἐξουθενημένα1Here, Paul uses **of the world** to describe both **the base things** and **the despised things**. As in [1:27](../01/27.md), he uses the possessive form to clarify that **base things and the despised things** are only **base** and **despised** from the perspective of the world. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “the base things and the despised things according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1591CO128unylfigs-synecdocheτοῦ κόσμου1When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
1601CO128gj19figs-hyperboleτὰ μὴ ὄντα1nothing, to bring to nothing things that are held as valuableHere, Paul further describes the **base things** and **the despised things** as if they were **things that are not**. He does not mean that the **base** and **despised things** do not exist. Instead, he is identifying how people often ignore the **base** and **despised things**, just as if they did not exist at all. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the things that people ignore” or “the nobodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1611CO128f11pgrammar-connect-logic-goalἵνα1things that are held as valuableHere, the word translated **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal)
1621CO128f9s5translate-unknownκαταργήσῃ1The word translated **he might bring to nothing** refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God has made **the things that are** unimportant and without function because he instead worked through **the things that are not**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a person has acted so that something else is no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “he might sideline” or “render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1631CO128etjgfigs-idiomτὰ ὄντα1In this context, **the things that are** does not refer primarily to things that exist. Rather, it refers primarily to things that are important in society and culture. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to important or significant things and people in your culture. Alternate translation: “the things that people care about” or “the somebodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1641CO129unr6grammar-connect-logic-goalὅπως1The word translated **so that** introduces a final goal. In [1:2829](../01/2829.md), Paul uses “in order that” to introduce immediate goals, but here, **so that** is the overall goal. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final or overall goal, making sure to distinguish it from the words you used in [1:2829](../01/2829.md), if possible. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1651CO129q4ghfigs-idiomμὴ…πᾶσα σὰρξ1Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to humans. Unlike in other places in his letters, **flesh** does not indicate sinful and weak humanity. Instead, it simply refers to humans compared to their creator, God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that commonly refers to people in general, especially if it includes the idea that people are created by God. Alternate translation: “no creature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1661CO129fdv5figs-metaphorἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, Paul speaks of people not boasting **before God**, as if they were standing in front of **God**. With this way of talking, Paul means that people are acting as if they could see God and God could see them. This means that they recognize that God knows what they say and do. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone recognizes that God knows what they are doing and thinking. Alternate translation: “when they know that God sees them” or “while God looks on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1671CO130yk4ygrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1The word translated **But** introduces a slight contrast between people who might boast and the Corinthians, who are united to Christ. However, **But** primarily means that Paul is moving to the next step in his argument. If **But** would not express this idea in your language, you could use a word that indicates that the author is moving on to the next step, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1681CO130fmr3figs-activepassiveἐξ αὐτοῦ…ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ1because of himWhile **because of him, you are in Christ Jesus** is not written the way most passive sentences are, this construction is like a passive sentence and may be difficult to represent in your language. What **because of him** means is that God is the source of how the Corinthians **are in Christ Jesus**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could rephrase these words so that “God” is the subject who makes it so that **you are in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “he puts you in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1691CO130alyjwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ1The word translated **of him** refers to God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the name “God” here. Alternate translation: “of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1701CO130a986figs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ1Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ Jesus, explains how **Christ Jesus** can be **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1711CO130f1atfigs-metaphorὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις;1Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from GodHere, Paul uses language and structure that is very similar to what he used in [1:24](../01/24.md). Refer back to that verse to help you translate this verse. When Paul says that Jesus **was made … wisdom** and **righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption**, he does not mean that Jesus has become these abstract ideas. Instead, he means that Jesus is the source of **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for **us** who are **in Christ Jesus**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could include some clarifying words such as “the source of.” Alternate translation: “who was made for us the source of wisdom from God, the source of righteousness, and also the source of sanctification and redemption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1721CO130lxpyfigs-activepassiveὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ1If you cannot write **who was made for us wisdom from God** in this form, you could state it in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God made for us wisdom from himself” or “whom God made for us wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1731CO130yynswriting-pronounsὃς1The word **who** refers to **Christ Jesus**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could write the name of **Christ Jesus** instead of using **who** or along with **who**. Alternate translation: “the Christ who” or (starting a new sentence) “Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1741CO130g5umfigs-abstractnounsσοφία…ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις1If you cannot write the abstract nouns **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** in your language, you could express their meaning by using verbs with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “a person through whom God taught us, judged us not guilty, and also set us apart for himself and set us free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1751CO131dm5hgrammar-connect-logic-resultἵνα1Paul uses the word translated **so that** to introduce (1) the result of everything he has said about God being the one who chooses and acts. Alternate translation: (starting a new sentence) “Because of all this” or “Therefore” (2) the purpose for which God chose the weak and foolish. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1761CO131gtv0figs-ellipsisἵνα καθὼς γέγραπται1Here, Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the needed words, such as “we should do.” Alternate translation: “so that we should behave just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1771CO131pagafigs-infostructureκαθὼς γέγραπται, ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω1If it would be unnatural in your language to put **just as it is written** before the quotation, you could put **just as it is written** at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord, just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1781CO131ebvwwriting-quotationsκαθὼς γέγραπται1In Pauls culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Jeremiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Jeremiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1791CO131fym9figs-imperativeὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω1Let the one who boasts, boast in the LordHere, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could (1) translate this one as a conditional sentence, adding “if.” Alternate translation: “If people want to boast, they should boast in the Lord” (2) translate this one using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who boasts should boast in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1801CO131mo0qfigs-idiomἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω1When Paul says that someone can **boast in the Lord**, he does not mean that they are inside **the Lord**. Rather, he means that they are boasting about **the Lord** and what he has done. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is boasting about someone else. Alternate translation: “Let … boast with reference to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1811CO2introk86p0# 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:104:15)<br> * Pauls attitude among the Corinthians (2:15)<br> * The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:616)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40. <br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])<br><br>### The Spirit<br><br>Paul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to Gods Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in [2:12](../02/12.md) refers to a “spirit” that is not Gods Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in [2:11](../02/11.md) refers to the non-physical part of a person. It does not refer to Gods Spirit or to something that Gods Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” ([2:13](../02/13.md); [2:15](../02/15.md)) and the adverb form “spiritually” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Both of these forms also refer to Gods Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by Gods Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of Gods Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” ([2:14](../02/14.md)), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by Gods Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>### The Mystery<br><br>Paul speaks of a “mystery” in [2:1](../02/01.md); [2:7](../02/07.md). This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to Gods plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The deep things of God<br><br>In [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options. <br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### The rulers of this age<br><br>In [2:6](../02/06.md); [2:8](../02/08.md), Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christs first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus ([2:8](../02/08.md)). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]])<br><br>### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”<br><br>Just as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for Gods wisdom and negative words for human wisdom. <br><br>### First person singular and plural<br><br>Paul uses the first person singular in [2:15](../02/0105.md) because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first person plural in [2:616](../02/0616.md) because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In [2:616](../02/0616.md), the first person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1821CO21pxmqgrammar-connect-words-phrasesκἀγὼ1Here, the word translated **And I** introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul preaches the Gospel in weak and foolish ways. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “In the same way, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1831CO21qvj7figs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί1brothersAlthough the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1841CO21koh8figs-explicitinfoἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς…ἦλθον οὐ1Here, Paul twice says that he has **come** to them. This is a structure that makes sense in Pauls language. However, if this repetition would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) translate the first **come** with a different word, such as “visit.” Alternate translation: “having visited you, did not come” (2) combine these two phrases. Alternate translation: “did not come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1851CO21o0vwgrammar-connect-time-backgroundἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς1The phrase **having come to you** gives background information. It describes what happened before Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify by using a word that introduces action that has already occurred. Alternate translation: “after I came to you” or “when I came to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
1861CO21o3ksfigs-possessionὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **speech** and **wisdom** that have **superiority**. If the meaning of this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **superiority** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “superior speech or superior wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1871CO21ikmttranslate-unknownὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας1The word translated **superiority** refers to how something or someone has more authority, skill, knowledge, or power than something or someone else. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable word or a short description. Alternate translation: “greatness of speech or of wisdom” or “speech or wisdom that was better than what others have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1881CO21kxiegrammar-connect-time-simultaneousκαταγγέλλων ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ1The phrase **proclaiming to you the mystery of God** gives the situation in which Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit by including a word that indicates that these things are happening at the same time. Alternate translation: “when I proclaimed to you the mystery of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
1891CO21nam8figs-possessionτὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mystery** that is: (1) revealed by God. Alternate translation: “the mystery given by God” or “the mystery from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “the mystery about God” or “the mystery concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1901CO22a2g9figs-hyperboleοὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν1I decided to know nothing … except Jesus ChristHere, Paul speaks as if he decides to forget all his knowledge and become ignorant of everything except for **Jesus Christ**. This is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize his focus on **Jesus Christ** as the one thing he wished to tell the Corinthians about. If this exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that it is an exaggeration or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I decided to speak among you only about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1911CO22nk9rgrammar-connect-exceptionsοὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον1If it would appear in your language that Paul makes a strong statement about knowing nothing and then contradicts it, you could reword this sentence so that there is no **except**. Alternate translation: “I decided that I would only know among you Jesus Christ and him crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
1921CO22zvgefigs-activepassiveτοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, using a phrase such as “he died on the cross” or adding a vague subject. Alternate translation: “how they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1931CO23xen3grammar-connect-words-phrasesκἀγὼ1Here, the word translated **And I** is the same word Paul used to introduce [2:1](../02/01.md). It again introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul himself was weak and foolish. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “Just as I did not use superior words and wisdom, I myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1941CO23s9lpκἀγὼ…ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς1I was with youAlternate translation: “And I remained with you”
1951CO23e8lifigs-abstractnounsἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, καὶ ἐν φόβῳ, καὶ ἐν τρόμῳ πολλῷ, 1in weaknessIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **weakness**, **fear**, and **trembling** with adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “as a weak, afraid, and frequently trembling person” or “while I ailed, feared, and often trembled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1961CO24lewvfigs-ellipsisὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις1Here, Paul does not use the verb **were** in his sentence. In English, this word is essential, so it has been included in the ULT. If you can translate this sentence without **were**, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain **were** as it appears in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1971CO24g5myfigs-abstractnounsὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **word** and **proclamation** with verbs. Alternate translation: “I spoke and proclaimed a message not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1981CO24m23efigs-abstractnounsἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **words** with a verb such as “speak” and the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “based on speaking persuasively and wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1991CO24hl7efigs-possessionσοφίας λόγοις1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to identify the **words** as containing **wisdom**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wise words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2001CO24chtxfigs-ellipsisἀλλ’ ἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως;1Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but my word and my proclamation were with a demonstration of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2011CO24kgnbfigs-abstractnounsἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **demonstration** and **power** with verbs. Alternate translation: “based on demonstrating the Spirit and how he works powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2021CO24qrfjfigs-possessionἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **demonstration** that: (1) comes from **the Spirit** and **power**. Alternate translation: “a demonstration by the Spirit and by power” (2) proves that the **Spirit** and **power** are present. Alternate translation: “a demonstration of the presence of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2031CO24s83htranslate-unknownἀποδείξει1The word translated **demonstration** refers to proving or showing that something is true. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “a validation” or “a confirmation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2041CO24s6h6figs-hendiadysΠνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως1This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **Spirit** tells who is acting in **power**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “of the Spirits power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2051CO25av3tfigs-idiomἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ ἐν σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ1Here, the phrase translated **faith … in** refers to believing something (**faith**) based on (**in**) something else. It does not refer, as it does in many other places, to believing in or trusting in something. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use translate **in** with a word or phrase that indicates the basis of the **faith**. Alternate translation: “your faith might not be based on the wisdom of men but based on the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2061CO25ovojfigs-activepassiveἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form by translating **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “you might believe not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2071CO25rkoyfigs-possessionσοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **men** think is **wisdom**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **men** with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “in human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2081CO25cdw7figs-gendernotationsἀνθρώπων1Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)<br>
2091CO25b29dfigs-possessionδυνάμει Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that **God** has and shows. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **power** as a verb or adverb with **God** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God working powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2101CO26azm7grammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Now we do speakHere, the word translated **Now** introduces a contrast with what Paul has said in [2:45](../02/45.md). In those verses, he said that he did not speak with **wisdom**. In this verse, however, he clarifies that he does **speak** with a kind of **wisdom**. If **Now** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of this,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2111CO26uenafigs-exclusiveλαλοῦμεν1Here, **we** refers to Paul and others like him who preach the Gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2121CO26uka3figs-abstractnounsσοφίαν-1speak wisdomIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wisely … the wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2131CO26eq1qfigs-nominaladjτοῖς τελείοις1the maturePaul is using the adjective **mature** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **mature** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “those who are mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2141CO26tm2efigs-possessionσοφίαν δὲ, οὐ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, οὐδὲ τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that fits with the standards and values of **this age** and that **rulers of this age** value. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “but not wisdom that fits with this age nor wisdom that the rulers of this age value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2151CO26xn85figs-ellipsisσοφίαν δὲ, οὐ 1Here, Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make this a complete thought. If so, you could supply words from early in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we do not speak wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2161CO26xydlfigs-possessionτῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which the rulers have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2171CO26endktranslate-unknownτῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου1The **rulers of this age** could refer to: (1) humans who have power. Alternate translation: “of the people who rule this age” (2) spiritual beings that have power. Alternate translation: “of the spiritual powers that rule this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2181CO26tbnhtranslate-unknownτῶν καταργουμένων1Paul has already used the word translated **passing away** in [1:28](../01/28.md), where it is translated **bring to nothing**. Here, the word means that the **rulers** are becoming ineffective, useless, or irrelevant, which means that they will no longer have power. If possible, translate this word like you did in [1:28](../01/28.md). Alternate translation: “who are becoming ineffective” or “who are losing their power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2191CO27l064figs-exclusiveλαλοῦμεν…ἡμῶν1Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and anyone who preaches the Gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. However, the word **our** does include the Corinthians along with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2201CO27bsmefigs-possessionΘεοῦ σοφίαν1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that **God** would consider to be true **wisdom**. This also means that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2211CO27wy8ufigs-abstractnounsσοφίαν1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wisdom by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise message” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
2221CO27xbyefigs-explicitinfoἐν μυστηρίῳ τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην1Here, Paul uses both **has been hidden** and **in a mystery**. Both of these phrases refer to something that is secret. If using both of these phrases is redundant and would be misunderstood in your language, you could use only one. Alternate translation: “that has been hidden” or “that is a mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2231CO27fd3sfigs-activepassiveτὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “that God has hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2241CO27ctb4writing-pronounsἣν1The word translated **that** refers to **the wisdom**, not **a mystery**. If what **that** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat **wisdom** here. Alternate translation: “, the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2251CO27k2ctfigs-idiomπρὸ τῶν αἰώνων1before the agesPaul uses the phrase translated **before the ages** to say that God **predestined** before he made anything. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “before the beginning of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2261CO27q2z9grammar-connect-logic-goalεἰς δόξαν ἡμῶν1for our gloryHere, the phrase translated **for our glory** introduces the purpose for which **God predestined** the **wisdom**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that we might have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2271CO28bw5iwriting-pronounsἣν1Just as in [2:7](../02/07.md), the word translated **which** refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If what **which** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns)
2281CO28imbkfigs-possessionτῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου1Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which **the rulers** have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
2291CO28ur15grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1The word translated **for** introduces Pauls proof that **the rulers** did not understand. If the meaning of this word would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2301CO28ji1ogrammar-connect-condition-contraryεἰ…ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν;1Here, Paul uses **if** to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the **rulers** were the ones who **crucified** Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand Gods wisdom. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by reversing the two clauses and making **they understood it** negative and **they would not have crucified the Lord of glory** positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
2311CO28zc89figs-possessionτὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης1the Lord of gloryHere, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Lord** who has **glory**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **glory** with an adjective or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord who has glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2321CO29fu1ygrammar-connect-logic-contrastἀλλὰ1Things that no eye … arisen, the things … who love himThe word translated **But** introduces a contrast with the hypothetical statement in [2:8](../02/08.md) about how the rulers would not have crucified the Lord if they had understood Gods wisdom. The **But** reminds the reader that this hypothetical statement is not true, and Paul wishes to introduce further statements about how people do not understand Gods wisdom. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word or phrase that would signal that Paul is now longer speaking hypothetically. Alternate translation: “But no,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2331CO29wuarfigs-ellipsisἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται1Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary in your language to form a complete thought. If necessary, you can supply a summary from [2:8](../02/08.md) of what the rulers did not understand and how they acted. Alternate translation: “But the rulers did not understand, just as it is written” or “But the rulers did do these things, just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2341CO29qcb2writing-quotationsκαθὼς γέγραπται1In Pauls culture,** just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Isaiah the prophet” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations)
2351CO29pt3mfigs-infostructureἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη, ἃ ἡτοίμασεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν1In this quotation, **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** are the **things God has prepared**. If hearing **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** before **God has prepared** would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order. Alternate translation: “God has prepared for those who love him what eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2361CO29j9ibfigs-synecdocheἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη1Things that no eye has seen, no ear has heard, no mind has imaginedHere, the words **eye**, **ear**, and **heart** refer to the parts of the person that see, hear, and think. In each case, the word means that the whole person sees, hears, and thinks. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to a person as a whole instead of just a part of that person. Alternate translation: “What a person has not seen, and a person has not heard, and has not arisen when a person thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2371CO29xe03figs-idiomἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη1The phrase **heart of man** refers to the place where humans think. If something “arises” there, that means that a human has thought about that thing. If the meaning of **arisen in the heart of man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “man has not thought about” or “man has not imagined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2381CO29pigifigs-possessionκαρδίαν ἀνθρώπου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **heart** that belongs to a **man**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate **man** with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “the human heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2391CO29yw0afigs-gendernotationsἀνθρώπου1Although the word translated **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
2401CO29us5ygrammar-collectivenounsἀνθρώπου1Here, even though **man** is written in singular form, it refers to anyone who would be considered a **man**, that is, any human. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you can make **man** plural. Alternate translation: “of men” or “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2411CO210z472grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1The word translated **For** introduces an explanation of the last line of the quote from [2:9](../02/09.md): “these things God has prepared for those who love him.” Paul wants to explain that these are the things that **God has revealed** to those who believe. If the meaning of **For** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2421CO210hp6wgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ2Here, the word translated **For** introduces an explanation for why Gods revelation is made **to us through the Spirit**. It is because the **Spirit searches everything** and knows everything that is **revealed**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation. Alternate translation: “He works through the Spirit because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2431CO210zccltranslate-unknownἐραυνᾷ1Here, the word translated **searches** refers to how someone can explore or know about something else. If the meaning of **searches** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use another word for “exploring” or “knowing.” Alternate translation: “comprehends” or “knows about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2441CO210bhyvtranslate-unknownτὰ βάθη τοῦ Θεοῦ1The phrase **deep things of God** refers to things about God that are hard to understand or things about God that no one can fully comprehend. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “secrets about God” or “things about God that no one knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2451CO211h4p8figs-rquestionτίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ?1For who knows a persons thoughts except the spirit of the person in him?Here, Paul uses question because he thinks that everyone will agree with him, for this information is common knowledge in his culture. He does not use a question because he is not sure about the answer. If using a question here would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that presents information that everyone knows and agrees with. Alternate translation: “For it is a well-known fact that no one among men knows the things of a man except the spirit of the man that {is} within him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2461CO211gw3ugrammar-connect-exceptionsτίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? οὕτως καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐδεὶς ἔγνωκεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ.1no one knows the deep things of God except the Spirit of GodIn both parts of this verse, Paul makes a negative claim and then gives an exception to that claim. If it would appear in your language that Paul is contradicting himself, you could use a different structure that also singles out one possibility and negates all other possibilities. Alternate translation: “For the spirit of the man that {is} within him is the only one among men that knows the things of a man, right? So also, the Spirit of God is the only one that knows the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
2471CO211li8efigs-gendernotationsἀνθρώπων…ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ1Although the words translated **men**, **man**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “among people … of a person … of the person that {is} within that person” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
2481CO211lmzifigs-genericnounἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ1Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If the meaning of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “of a certain man … of that certain man that {is} within him” or “of men … of men that {is} within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2491CO211wfr2figs-idiomτίς…ἀνθρώπων1The phrase **who among men** is a way of asking about people or things that belong to a specific category. Paul means to ask if there are any **men** who can know **the things of a man**. He uses this phrase because God also **knows the things of a man**, so he must limit his question to only **men**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that asks about people or things, but only those that belong in a specific category. Alternate translation: “which man” or “out of all men, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2501CO211mi27figs-idiomτὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the phrases **the things of a man** and **the things of God** to refer to everything that makes up the person, including personality, thoughts, actions, desires, possessions, and many more similar categories. Paul is intentionally general and does not narrow down which of these categories he has in mind. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to all the aspects of a person that makes that person unique. Alternate translation: “all the details about a man … all the details about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2511CO211i47dtranslate-unknownτὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ1spirit of the personThe word translated **spirit** is the same word that Paul uses for the Holy **Spirit**. It refers to the interior life of a person, to the part of them that people cannot see, including their thoughts and desires. If possible, use the same word here that you will use later in the verse for the **Spirit**, since Paul is drawing an analogy between the human **spirit** and Gods **Spirit**. If you cannot use the word for Gods **Spirit** to describe a human being, you could: (1) refer simply to a human without specifying which part of the human **knows**. Alternate translation: “the man himself” (2) use an expression that refers to the interior life of a human. Alternate translation: “the consciousness of the man that {is} within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2521CO211to3tfigs-idiomτὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ1In this culture, people would speak of the non-physical part of human beings as if it were inside the physical part of human beings. Here, Paul speaks in this way when he says that the **spirit of the man** is **within him**. By using **within him**, Paul is identifying the **spirit** as the one that belongs to **the man**. It is not some other mans **spirit**. If the meaning of **within him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could: (1) use a word or phrase that identifies that the **spirit** belongs to **the man** only. Alternate translation: “that mans own spirit” (2) express the idea by using a phrase that describes where a human beings non-physical part would be in your culture. Alternate translation: “the spirit of the man that permeates him” or “the spirit of the man that suffuses him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2531CO212zbv8grammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1General Information:Here, the word translated **But** introduces the next part of Pauls argument. If the meaning of **But** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that signifies that the argument is moving on. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2541CO212evtsfigs-infostructureἡμεῖς…οὐ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου ἐλάβομεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ1If stating the negative before the positive would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “we received the Spirit who {is} from God, not the spirit of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2551CO212emsetranslate-unknownτὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου1The phrase **spirit of the world** could refer to: (1) a **spirit** that does not actually exist. In other words, Paul is saying that the Spirit they received did not come from the **world** but rather came from **God**. Alternate translation: “a spirit that comes from the world” (2) human ways of thinking and understanding, which could be called a **spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that they did not receive human ways of thinking but rather ways of thinking that Gods Spirit brings. Alternate translation: “human ways of thinking” ((See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2561CO212ev7jfigs-possessionτὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that comes from or has its source in **the world**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that **the world** is the source or origin of this **spirit**. Alternate translation: “the spirit from the world” or “the spirit that comes from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2571CO212vw4vfigs-ellipsisἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα1Here, Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. If this shortened form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply some words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we received the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2581CO212w1qdfigs-activepassiveτὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could make God the subject of the **who** statement. Alternate translation: “the Spirit whom God sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2591CO212n1c7figs-activepassiveτὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ χαρισθέντα ἡμῖν1freely given to us by GodIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that God has freely given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2601CO213nan2figs-exclusiveλαλοῦμεν1Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the Gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive)
2611CO213u797figs-infostructureοὐκ ἐν διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις, ἀλλ’ ἐν διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος1The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdomIf putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them, putting **words** with the positive statement. Alternate translation: “in words taught by the Spirit, not in those taught by human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2621CO213yg45figs-activepassiveδιδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις1The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdomIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “words that human wisdom teaches” or “words that humans teach as wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2631CO213ywbwfigs-activepassiveδιδακτοῖς Πνεύματος1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “those that the Spirit teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2641CO213gueqtranslate-unknownπνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες1Here, the phrase **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** could mean: (1) that Paul and those with him interpret **spiritual things** and ideas with **spiritual words**. Alternate translation: “interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words” (2) that Paul and those with him explain **spiritual things** to **spiritual** people. Alternate translation: “explaining spiritual things to spiritual people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2651CO213kinzgrammar-connect-time-simultaneousσυνκρίνοντες1Here, the word translated **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these things**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2661CO213mnpqtranslate-unknownσυνκρίνοντες1The word translated **combining** could mean: (1) interpreting or explaining an idea. Alternate translation: “interpreting” (2) putting two things together, either to compare or blend them together. Alternate translation: “comparing” or “compounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2671CO214i8jwgrammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1The word translated **But** introduces a new part of Pauls argument, and it also introduces a contrast with how Paul and those with him speak by the power of the Spirit in [2:13](../02/13.md). Unlike Paul and those with him, the **natural person** does not have the Spirit and does not use spiritual words. If the meaning of **But** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2681CO214hq3utranslate-unknownψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος1unspiritual personThe phrase **the natural person** describes a person who does not have Gods Spirit. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received Gods Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2691CO214cve2figs-genericnounψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος, οὐ δέχεται…αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται1General Information:Paul uses the words **person**, **him**, and **he** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “any natural person does not receive … to him or her … he or she is not able” or “natural people do not receive … to them … they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2701CO214vvjufigs-gendernotationsαὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται1Here, the words translated **him** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “to that person … that person is not able” or “to him or her … he or she is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2711CO214fye5figs-activepassiveμωρία…αὐτῷ ἐστίν1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could reverse the structure and make **him** the subject of a verb such as “think” or “consider.” Alternate translation: “for he thinks that they are foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2721CO214gwe3figs-activepassiveπνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται1because they are spiritually discernedIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form with vague or non-specific subject. Alternate translation: “people can only discern them spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2731CO214vznrπνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται1Alternate translation: “they are discerned by the power of the Spirit” or “they are discerned by people who are indwelt by the Spirit”
2741CO215w4q7translate-unknownὁ…πνευματικὸς1the one who is spiritualHere, Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have Gods Spirit. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received Gods Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2751CO215gcv7figs-genericnounὁ…πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει…αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται1Paul uses the words **spiritual one** and **he himself** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun)
2761CO215ap89figs-hyperboleτὰ πάντα1Here, Paul uses phrase translated **all things** as an exaggeration to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern Gods gifts and the message of the Gospel. He does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If this exaggeration would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2771CO215ji5nfigs-activepassiveαὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2781CO215ypl6figs-gendernotationsαὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται1Here, the words translated **he himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he himself** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
2791CO215zg4bfigs-explicitαὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται1Here, Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul speaking about the possibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2801CO216ye98grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word translated **For** introduces proof from Scripture to support what Paul has said about the “natural person” and the “spiritual” person in [2:1415](../02/1415.md). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing proof. Alternate translation: “You can tell that these things are true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2811CO216tj79writing-quotationsγὰρ1The word translated **For** is the only word that Paul has used to introduce this quotation from the Old Testament, in this case, from the book written by Isaiah the prophet. If introducing a quotation in this way would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For, as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For, according to Isaiah the prophet,” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2821CO216m4pufigs-rquestionτίς…ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν?1For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him?Here, the passage that Paul quotes from the book of Isaiah uses a question to indicate that no human **has known the mind of the Lord**, and no human **will instruct him**. The question is not asking for information. Instead, it assumes that the answer is “no one,” and the author uses a question to make a negative claim that is stronger than a simple statement. If the question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “no one has known the mind of the Lord—no one will instruct him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2831CO216waccfigs-possessionνοῦν Κυρίου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that the **Lord** has or uses. If it would be misunderstood that the **Lord** is one who is thinking with **the mind**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that the Lord thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2841CO216r18kfigs-metaphorνοῦν Χριστοῦ ἔχομεν1Here, Paul speaks as if **we** are people who possess **the mind of Christ**. Paul means that **we** are able to understand what Christ thinks and share the same ways of thinking with him. He does not mean that we have taken Christs **mind** from him or that we no longer have our own **mind**. If “having someone elses mind” would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with a verb such as “share.” Alternate translation: “think the same thoughts as Christ does” or “share in the mind of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2851CO216pr9bfigs-possessionνοῦν Χριστοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that **Christ** has or uses. If it would be misunderstood that **Christ** is one who is thinking with **the mind**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that Christ thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2861CO3introg6ku0# 1 Corinthians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:104:15)<br> * Paul identifies the divisions (3:15)<br> * Farming metaphor (3:69a)<br> * Building metaphor (3:9b15<br> * Temple metaphor (3:1617)<br> * Wisdom and folly (3:1820)<br> * All things are yours (3:2123)<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20. Verse 19 quotes from Job 5:13, and verse 20 quotes from Psalm 94:11.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Fleshly people<br><br>In [3:14](../03/0104.md), Paul calls the Corinthian believers “fleshly.” In [3:3](../03/03.md), he defines “fleshly” as “walking according to men.” The word “fleshly” thus refers to people who think and behave from a merely human point of view, without thinking and behaving from Gods perspective. The opposite of “fleshly” is “spiritual,” which refers to those who think and behave by the power of the Spirit (see [3:1](../0/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### Fire and judgment<br><br>In Pauls culture, fire was commonly associated with the day when God would come to judge everyone. Paul uses this association when he makes use of the metaphor of a building. When a building catches on fire, it shows how well it was build. Similarly, when the fire of Gods judgment comes, it will show who has taught the gospel correctly. Fire fits within the metaphor of a building, but it is not just a part of that metaphor. If it is possible, retain the language of fire for Gods judgment. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judgmentday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])<br><br>### Wisdom and Foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapters one and two, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapters one and two. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Infants and food metaphor<br><br>In [3:12](../03/0102.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians are infants who were, and still are, unable to eat any solid food but can only drink milk. By speaking about them as if they were infants, Paul wishes to tell the Corinthians that they are spiritually immature. They are immature enough that they can only drink milk. Paul uses “milk” to refer to the very basic teachings about Christ, while he uses “solid food” to refer to the more advanced teachings. In translating this metaphor, use words that identify what very small children can eat (milk) and what they cannot eat (solid food). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Farming metaphor<br><br>In [3:69a](../03/0609.md), Paul speaks as if he and Apollos were farmers. Paul first proclaimed the gospel to the Corinthians, so he is like a farmer who plants seeds. Apollos taught the Corinthians more about the gospel, so he is like a farmer who waters the plants when they start to grow. However, God is the one who makes seeds grow into plants and the one who enables believers to accept and learn more about the gospel. With this metaphor, Paul wishes to emphasize that he and Apollos are equal in that they both teach about the gospel. However, neither one of them is significant in comparison to God, who is the one who actually enables people to accept and believe in the gospel. If possible, preserve the farming metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Building metaphor<br><br>In [3:9b15](../03/0915.md), Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were a house. Paul is the one who laid the house's foundation, because he was the one who first proclaimed the gospel to them. Other people, whom Paul does not name, build on the foundation. They are the ones who are teaching the Corinthians more, whether what they teach is correct or not. Paul then says that the building will catch on fire, and what each of these builders used to construct the house will become clear. If they built with durable materials, they will be rewarded, but if they built with materials that burn, they will suffer loss, and the builders themselves will barely escape from the fire. In speaking this way, Paul is warning those who teach more about the gospel that God himself will judge whether what they teach is correct or not. If it is incorrect, those teachers will lose everything and barely be saved themselves. If it is correct, God will honor and reward those teachers. If possible, preserve the building metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Temple metaphor<br><br>In [3:1617](../03/1617.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were Gods temple. By speaking this way, he identifies the Corinthian believers as a place where God is specially present. Paul then notes that anyone who does anything to harm Gods temple will be punished by God. Since the Corinthians are like Gods temple, God will punish anyone who does anything to harm them, including if anyone tries to divide them up into different groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul asks many questions in this chapter ([3:35](../03/0305.md); [16](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Christ is Gods<br><br>In [3:23](../03/23.md), Paul says that “Christ is Gods.” He does not mean that Christ is a person who belongs to God, but is not God. Rather, he means that Christ is part of who God is. Christ belongs to the being of God. In your translation, you should to try to preserve this meaning. However, if possible, do not make your translation into a statement about the divinity of Christ, since that is not the main point that Paul is trying to make.
2871CO31zfdggrammar-connect-words-phrasesκἀγώ1The word translated **And I** is the same word that appears at the beginning of [2:1](../02/01.md). Just as there, Paul uses **And I** here to introduce how his own experience visiting the Corinthians fits into the general pattern he has outlined at the end of chapter 2. Here, however, his experience with the Corinthians is the opposite of what he would have liked. Therefore, the words **And I** introduce a contrast with what he said in [2:16](../02/16.md) about having the mind of Christ. If the meaning of **And I** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a specific example or a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “But I” or “As for me, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2881CO31r4iwfigs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί1brothersAlthough the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **brothers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
2891CO31jn0qfigs-infostructureοὐκ ἠδυνήθην λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς, ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ.1If stating the negative before the positive would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statements. Alternate translation: “had to speak to you as to fleshly, as to infants in Christ, not as to spiritual” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure)
2901CO31jx17figs-nominaladjπνευματικοῖς…σαρκίνοις1spiritual peoplePaul is using the adjectives **spiritual** and **fleshly** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “to spiritual people … to fleshly people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
2911CO31r5w5figs-ellipsisἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις1fleshly peopleHere, Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the needed words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but I spoke to you as to fleshly, I spoke to you as to infants” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
2921CO31ja6tfigs-metaphorνηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ1as to little children in ChristHere, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **infants**. He wants the Corinthians to think about how **infants** are immature, do not have much knowledge, and are unable to understand most things. By calling the Corinthians **infants in Christ**, he means that in their relationship with Jesus, they were immature, had little knowledge, and were unable to understand very much. If calling the Corinthians **infants** would be misunderstood in your language, you could a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to beginners in Christ” or “to those who could understand very little about their faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2931CO31m588figs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ1Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or being united to Christ, explains in what area of their lives they were like **infants**. They acted like **infants** in their relationship with Christ. If the meaning of **in Christ** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by referring to their “faith” in **Christ** or their “relationship” with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in their faith in Christ” or “in their relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2941CO32vg2vfigs-metaphorγάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα1I fed you milk, not solid foodPaul refers to **milk** because it is the food of “infants,” whom Paul already mentioned in [3:1](../03/01.md). The **milk** is the only thing that the “infants” can eat, and Paul thus uses **milk** to refer to the very simplest things that the Corinthians were able to understand about the Gospel. “Infants” do not eat **solid food**, because they are not yet able to properly chew or digest it. So, Paul uses **solid food** to refer to the more complex things about the Gospel that he could not teach the Corinthians because they were “infants,” that is, people who could not understand such complex teachings. If that metaphor about **milk** and **solid food** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I taught you the basics, not the full picture” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2951CO32fujtfigs-ellipsisοὐ βρῶμα1Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add a phrase such as “to eat.” Alternate translation: “not solid food to eat” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
2961CO32d2x5figs-ellipsisοὔπω…ἐδύνασθε…οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε1Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If the sentence would be misunderstood without these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
2971CO32i3r5grammar-connect-logic-contrastἀλλ’1The word translated **Indeed** functions to contrast the time when Paul visited the Corinthians with the time when Paul is writing this letter. He speaks of these two different times to say that the Corinthians could not to eat the **solid food** at either time. If the meaning of **Indeed** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts two times or a word that introduces additional information. Alternate translation: “But” or “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2981CO33m712figs-nominaladjσαρκικοί-1still fleshlyPaul is using the adjective **fleshly** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “fleshly people … fleshly people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj)
2991CO33o618figs-abstractnounsὅπου…ἐν ὑμῖν ζῆλος καὶ ἔρις1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **jealousy** and **strife** by using verbs such as “being jealous” and “fighting.” Alternate translation: “where you are jealous and fight with one another” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
3001CO33s1uyfigs-metonymyὅπου1The word translated **where** often refers to space. However, here Paul uses it to refer to time. Instead of identifying a specific location, it identifies a specific time. If the meaning of **where** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to time. Alternate translation: “when there is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3011CO33k5llfigs-rquestionοὐχὶ σαρκικοί ἐστε καὶ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε?1are you not living according to the flesh, and are you not walking by human standards?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from the **jealousy** and the **strife**. Alternate translation: “you are fleshly and walking according to men” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
3021CO33oz5vfigs-hendiadysκαὶ2Here, Paul uses the word translated **and** to introduce a definition of what **fleshly** means. It means **walking according to men**. If you cannot use **and** to introduce a definition or explanation, you could use another word or phrase that does introduce a definition or explanation. Alternate translation: “, that is, are you not” or “, which means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
3031CO33as2ufigs-metaphorκατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε1Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking**. If **walking** would not be understood as a description of a persons way of life in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “behaving as men do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3041CO33ljrifigs-idiomκατὰ ἄνθρωπον1Here, Paul speaks of behavior that is **according to men**. By using this phrase, he wishes to identify behaviors that people who think and act in only human ways do. These people do not have Gods Spirit, so they “walk” according to the values and goals of this world. If the phrase **according to men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that refers to things and behaviors that people who do not believe value. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans value” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3051CO33y8b4figs-gendernotationsἄνθρωπον1Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
3061CO34cidrgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word translated **For** introduces further evidence for Pauls argument that the Corinthians in acting in merely humans ways. If that meaning for **For** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave **For** untranslated or express the idea using a word or phrase that introduces more evidence or examples. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3071CO34g8ztwriting-pronounsλέγῃ τις…ἕτερος1Here, Paul uses the pronouns **one** and **another** to give two examples of some people in the Corinthian church who are sayings these kinds of things. He does not mean that only two people are saying these things. He also does not mean that these are the only things that people in the church are saying. If the form that Paul uses would be misunderstood in your language, you could use words that introduce examples of a larger pattern, and you could add a phrase that indicates that the words **I am of Paul** and **I am of of Apollos** are two examples of the kinds of things that they are saying. Alternate translation: “some people among you say things like … other people among you say things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3081CO34rmtqfigs-quotationsἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that he or she is of Paul … that he or she is of Apollos” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations)
3091CO34g68pfigs-possessionἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ1Just as in [1:12](../01/12.md), Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that people are claiming to be part of a specific leaders group. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “I follow PaulI follow Apollos” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession)
3101CO34zsbytranslate-namesΠαύλου…Ἀπολλῶ1These are the names of two men. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
3111CO34s96gfigs-rquestionοὐκ ἄνθρωποί ἐστε?1are you not living as human beings?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from what Paul says the Corinthians are saying. Alternate translation: “you are men” or “this shows that you are men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3121CO34mmlqfigs-explicitἄνθρωποί1When Paul says that the Corinthians are **men**, he means that they are “only” or “merely” **men**. He is not identifying them as humans. Rather, he means that they are acting and speaking from “merely human” perspective rather than from Gods perspective, a perspective they can share if they have Gods Spirit. If the meaning of **men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could add a word or phrase that clarifies that **men** refers to a “merely human” view of the world. Alternate translation: “merely men” or “speaking from a human perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3131CO34te5rfigs-gendernotationsἄνθρωποί1Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
3141CO35typogrammar-connect-words-phrasesοὖν1The word translated **then** introduces a further stage in Pauls argument. He has argued in [3:3](../03/04.md) that **Paul** and **Apollos** should not be treated as leaders of groups. In this verse, he goes on to explain how he thinks that **Paul** and **Apollos** should be treated, which is as servants of Christ. Thus, the word translated **then** introduces who **Paul** and **Apollos** really are. If how **then** functions would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “, therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3151CO35m463figs-rquestionτί οὖν ἐστιν Ἀπολλῶς? τί δέ ἐστιν Παῦλος? διάκονοι1Who then is Apollos? And who is Paul?Here, Paul uses these questions to do two things. First, the questions imply that **Apollos** and **Paul** are not very important. Therefore, an implied answer to these questions would be that **Apollos** and **Paul** are “not very much.” Second, Paul uses the questions to introduce his own answer to these questions. After using the questions to imply that he and **Apollos** are not much, he then states that they are **servants**. If using questions in these ways would be misunderstood in your language, you could express them as a statement about the status of **Apollos** and **Paul** as **servants**, and you could use a word such as “only” or “merely” to express the idea that they are not very important. Alternate translation: “Apollos and Paul are merely servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3161CO35i9d0translate-namesἈπολλῶς…Παῦλος1These are the names of two men. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
3171CO35lq6nfigs-123personἐστιν Παῦλος?1And who is Paul?In this verse, **Paul** speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If this use of **Paul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **Paul** is naming himself. Alternate translation: “am I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person)
3181CO35qmy2figs-ellipsisδιάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε1Servants through whom you believedHere, Paul omits several words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could include the words needed to make a complete thought, such as “we are” or “they are.” Alternate translation: “We are servants through whom you believed” or “They are servants through whom you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3191CO35edodfigs-explicitδιάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε1When **Paul** says that he and **Apollos** are those **through whom** the Corinthians **believed**, he is implying that the Corinthians believed in someone other than **Paul** and **Apollos**. That is, they believed in Christ. If this implication about **whom** the Corinthians **believed** in would be misunderstood in your language, you could make it explicit by including what the Corinthians **believed** in, which is “Christ” and not **Apollos** or **Paul**. Alternate translation: “Servants through whom you believed in Christ” or “Servants through whom you believed in Christ, not in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3201CO35h2jvgrammar-connect-words-phrasesκαὶ…ὡς 1Here, the words translated **even as** introduce the way in which **Apollos** and **Paul** act as **servants**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that could introduce the ways in which **Apollos** and **Paul** asre servants. Alternate translation: “who do what” or “serving just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3211CO35f6wmfigs-ellipsisκαὶ ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Κύριος ἔδωκεν1Servants through whom you believed, to each of whom the Lord gave tasksHere, Paul omits what **the Lord gave** because it would be clear that he means that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task **to each one** of them. If **the Lord gave to each one** would be misunderstood in your language, you could add a word or phrase that indicates that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task. Alternate translation: “even as the Lord gave a task to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3221CO35e8tbwriting-pronounsἑκάστῳ1The word translated **to each one** directly refers back to **Apollos** and **Paul**. However, it also probably refers to everyone who serves the Lord. If you can refer to multiple individuals considered separately in your language, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “to each and every one who serves him” or “per person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3231CO36iah7figs-exmetaphorἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.1I plantedPaul speaks about the roles that God gave to him and to **Apollos** as if they were farmers who **planted** and **watered** their crops. The one who “plants” is the person who begins the farming process, just like Paul first introduced the Corinthians to the gospel. The one who “waters” is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like **Apollos** continued to proclaim the gospel to the Corinthians. It is a well-known fact in Pauls culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enabled to the Corinthians to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how the Corinthians received the Gospel would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I invested the money, Apollos managed the portfolio, but God gave the return on investment” or “I introduced you to the gospel, Apollos taught you more about the gospel, but God enabled you to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3241CO36ic6xfigs-ellipsisἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.1Paul never states what it is that he **planted**, that **Apollos watered**, and that **God caused to grow**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is **planted** and **watered**, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “I planted the seeds, Apollos watered the plants, but God caused the them to grow” or “I planted the crop, Apollos watered it, but God caused it to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3251CO36gyi5translate-namesἈπολλῶς1Apollos wateredThis is the name of a man. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
3261CO36iq9ngrammar-connect-logic-contrastἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς1but God gave the growthHere, Paul uses **but** to contrast himself and **Apollos** with **God**. The point is that what he did and what **Apollos** did are at the same level of importance, but Gods work is the most important. Another way to understand this contrast is to notice that Paul and **Apollos** assist in the process of plants growing, but **God** is the only one who actually makes them grow. Again, the main point is that Paul and **Apollos** are simply “servants” of God ([3:5](../03/05.md)) in a process that God oversees. If **but** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that puts Paul and **Apollos** together in contrast with **God**. Alternate translation: “planted, and Apollos watered. However, it was God who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3271CO37g78ngrammar-connect-logic-resultὥστε1Paul uses the word translated **so then** to introduce a conclusion or inference from what he said about watering, planting, and growth in [3:6](../03/06.md). Here, he wishes to explain that the difference between **God** who **causes the growth** and anyone who **plants** or **waters** is about their importance in the process. It is **God** who is important, because he is the only one who **causes the growth**, just as he stated in [3:6](../03/06.md). If that meaning of **so then** would be misunderstood in your language, you could a comparable word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or an inference. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3281CO37c4wyfigs-exmetaphorοὔτε ὁ φυτεύων ἐστίν τι, οὔτε ὁ ποτίζων, ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.1Paul now speaks in general about the tasks that God has given to those who proclaim the gospel. He continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The **one who plants** is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The **one who waters** is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. It is a well-known fact in Pauls culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enables those who believe to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God enables others to receive it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “neither the one who invests the money nor the one who manages the portfolio is anything, but God {is} the one who gives the return on investment” or “neither the person who introduces believers to the gospel nor the person who teaches believers more about the gospel is anything, but God {is} the one who enables believers to have faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor)
3291CO37dl3zfigs-genericnounὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων1neither he who plants is anything … but God is the one who causes the growthWhen Paul speaks of **the one who plants**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one who waters**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in the last verse ([3:6](../03/06.md)). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one who** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
3301CO37uutkfigs-ellipsisὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων1Paul never states what it is that someone **plants** and that someone else **waters**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
3311CO37jrb1figs-hyperboleτι1Here, the word translated **anything** is an exaggeration that emphasizes how unimportant the people who plant and water are. It is as if they are nothing, as if they do not exist. Paul does not mean that they do not exist. Instead, he uses this exaggeration to show how unimportant the people who plant and water are compared to God. If the meaning of **anything** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates “importance.” Alternate translation: “important” or “significant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3321CO37hmk6figs-ellipsisἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.1Here, Paul does not directly finish the contrast between the people who plant and water and **God**. What he means is that **God** is the one who is important because he **causes the growth**. If the meaning of this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the words that Paul omits, including a word or phrase about how God is “important.” Alternate translation: “but God, who is the one who causes the growth, is the important one” or “but God is the significant one because he causes the growth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3331CO37c68gfigs-abstractnounsαὐξάνων1but God is the one who causes the growthIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **growth** with a verb such as “grow.” Alternate translation: “who makes it grow” or “who causes things to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3341CO38dmfsgrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word translated **Now** introduces the next step in Pauls argument. If the meaning of **Now** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3351CO38s16bfigs-exmetaphorὁ φυτεύων…καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν; ἕκαστος δὲ τὸν ἴδιον μισθὸν λήμψεται, κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον κόπον.1he who plants and he who waters are oneHere, Paul continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The **one who plants** is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The **one who waters** is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. The **one who plants** and the **one who waters** will receive **wages** that match the kind of **labor** they did. In the same way, those who first proclaim the gospel and those who teach more about the gospel will receive rewards from God that match the task they accomplished. If the way Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God rewards those who do so, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the one who invests the money and the one who manages the portfolio are one, and each will receive his own paycheck according to his own job” or “the person who introduces believers to the gospel and the person who teaches believers more about the gospel are one, and each will receive his own reward from God according to his own task” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor)
3361CO38ydx8figs-genericnounὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων1Just as in [3:7](../03/07.md), when Paul speaks of **the one who plants**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one who waters**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in [3:6](../03/06.md). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one who** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
3371CO38fsj6figs-ellipsisὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων1Paul never states what it is that someone **plants** and that someone else **waters**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis)
3381CO38za43figs-metaphorἕν εἰσιν1are onePaul here speaks as if the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** are the same person. He speaks in this way in order to: (1) show that the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** do the same kind of work with the same goal in mind. Alternate translation: “share a common goal” or “do the same kind of work” (2) state that the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** have equal status. Alternate translation: “are of equal importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3391CO38dfhnfigs-gendernotationsτὸν ἴδιον-1Here, the words translated **his** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **his** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own … his or her own” or “that persons own … that persons own” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
3401CO39vphlgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγάρ1Here, the word translated **For** introduces a summary statement that concludes the whole section in which Paul compares those who proclaim the gospel to farmers ([3:58](../03/0508.md)). If this meaning of **For** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a summary statement. Alternate translation: “Thus,” or “In the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3411CO39gj26figs-exclusiveἐσμεν1we are brutally beatenHere, **we** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3421CO39r9snfigs-possessionΘεοῦ…συνεργοί1Gods fellow workersHere, Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **fellow workers** who work for **God**. Alternate translation: “coworkers under Gods leadership” (2) **workers** who join **God** in Gods work. Alternate translation: “people who work with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3431CO39iaanfigs-infostructureΘεοῦ γεώργιον, Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή ἐστε.1Here, Paul switches from a metaphor about farming to a metaphor about building. He makes this switch without using any connecting words, and he makes the switch within one sentence. Consider whether your language would include the introduction of a new topic at the end of the previous section or at the beginning of a new section, and put **Gods building** where it would be understood as introducing a new section, including **you are** again if it would be necessary. Additionally, if beginning a new section without using a connecting word or phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use such a word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “you are Gods field. In fact, you are also Gods building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
3441CO39lqg1figs-metaphorΘεοῦ γεώργιον1Gods gardenHere, Paul concludes the farming metaphor he began in [3:6](../03/06.md). He identifies the Corinthians as a **field** that is owned by **God**. It is in this field that those who proclaim the gospel “plant” and “water” the crop. By calling the Corinthians a **Gods field**, Paul means to say that they belong to God and that they are the people among whom those who proclaim the gospel work. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Gods portfolio” or “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3451CO39l2fqfigs-exmetaphorΘεοῦ οἰκοδομή1Gods buildingHere, Paul introduces a new metaphor that compares the Corinthians to a building. This building belongs to God, and those who proclaim the gospel, including Paul, help to construct the building. He uses this metaphor and variations of it in [3:917](../03/0917.md). Here, he calls the Corinthians **Gods building**, by which he means basically the same thing as when he calls them **Gods field**. They belong to God, and he and others who proclaim the gospel work among them. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Gods movie” or “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3461CO310iln9figs-activepassiveτοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι1According to the grace of God that was given to meIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “that God gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3471CO310a69qfigs-exmetaphorὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα, ἄλλος δὲ ἐποικοδομεῖ. ἕκαστος δὲ βλεπέτω, πῶς ἐποικοδομεῖ.1I laid a foundationPaul began using the metaphor of a house in [3:9](../03/09.md). Here he continues that metaphor by speaking about himself as a **wise master builder** who lays **a foundation**. By speaking in this way, he means that he is the one who first introduced them to the gospel, just like a **master builder** first lays **a foundation**. He then speaks of people who build **on** that foundation. By speaking in this way, he means that others who proclaim more about the gospel can only do this by using and continuing from the good news that Paul already proclaimed. If this extended metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I proposed an idea for a movie as a skilled script writer, and another is filming that movie, but let each person be careful how they film that movie” or “as a wise church planter, I first proclaimed the gospel to you, and another is teaching you more about that gospel, but let each one be careful how he teaches you more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3481CO310nw8ffigs-infostructureὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα1The phrase **as a wise master builder** could describe: (1) the way in which Paul **laid a foundation**. Alternate translation: “, I laid a foundation as a wise master builder” (2) the specific **grace** that God gave to Paul. Alternate translation: “to be a wise master builder, I laid a foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
3491CO310mpxltranslate-unknownσοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων1Here, the word translated **master builder** refers to the person who is in charge of an entire construction project, including designing it and making sure that the building is constructing according to the design. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “a wise architect” or “a wise construction manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3501CO310mqb8writing-pronounsἄλλος…ἐποικοδομεῖ1Here, the word translated **another** refers to anyone who **is building on** the foundation, including Apollos. However, Paul does not mean to identify one specific person who **is building**. If it would be misunderstood that **another** refers to any builder, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who does a specific task. Alternate translation: “other people are building on it” or “someone else is building on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3511CO310pwi7figs-imperativeἕκαστος…βλεπέτω1another is building on itHere, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
3521CO310px9cwriting-pronounsἕκαστος1each manHere, the word translated **each one** refers to any person who **builds** on the **foundation**. If the meaning of **each one** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who falls into a certain category. Alternate translation: “every person who builds on it” or “each builder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3531CO310krd6writing-pronounsἐποικοδομεῖ2Here, the word translated **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she builds on it” or “each one builds on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3541CO311m4j2grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, the word translated **for** introduces the reason why the people who build on the foundation should “be careful how” they build “on it” ([3:10](../03/10.md)). They need to “be careful” because what they build must match the only **foundation** that exists, which is **Jesus Christ**. If **for** would not indicate this connection in your language, you could express the idea with a word that gives a reason or basis for a command. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3551CO311qd1ofigs-exmetaphorθεμέλιον…ἄλλον οὐδεὶς δύναται θεῖναι, παρὰ τὸν κείμενον, ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.1In this verse, Paul continues the metaphor about houses by continuing to speak about a **foundation**. Here, he reminds the Corinthians that each house has only one **foundation**, and once that **foundation** has been **laid**, no one lays another **foundation** for the house. He speaks in this way to remind them that only one person can introduce them to the gospel, and anyone who tries to introduce them to another gospel is building a different house, not the same house. Paul then directly states that the **foundation** refers to the message about **Jesus Christ** that he preached to them. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the message about **Jesus Christ** that he proclaimed to them should be the starting point and basis for everything else they learn about the gospel. If the meaning of this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “no one can write a script other than the one that has already been written, that is, Jesus Christ” or “no one can first proclaim a gospel to you other than the one that I already proclaimed to you, which is Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3561CO311jt2bfigs-activepassiveτὸν κείμενον1no one can lay a foundation other than the one that has been laidIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form, with Paul as the person who is doing the “laying.” Alternate translation: “the one that I already laid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3571CO311yh1fὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.1Alternate translation: “which is Jesus Christ” or (starting a new sentence) “That foundation is Jesus Christ”
3581CO311azm0figs-metonymyἸησοῦς Χριστός1Here, Paul uses the words translated **Jesus Christ** to refer to the message he proclaimed to them about **Jesus Christ**. If the meaning of **Jesus Christ** would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a word or phrase that refers to Pauls message about **Jesus Christ**. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3591CO312nuzagrammar-connect-words-phrasesδέ1Here, the word translated **Now** introduces the next step in Pauls argument. If the meaning of **Now** would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3601CO312nbu2figs-exmetaphorεἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην1Now if anyone builds on the foundation with gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, or strawHere, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He compares those who teach more about the gospel with builders who construct a house on its foundation. These builders can use a variety of different materials to construct the house, and Paul lists six. The first three, **gold, silver, precious stones**, are more durable, while the last three, **wood, hay, straw**, are less durable. It is clear that Paul is interested in durability because of the next verse, where he states that all of these materials will be tested with fire ([3:13](../03/13.md)). By speaking this way, he indicates that those who proclaim more about the gospel can teach things that are more or less true and acceptable to God. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “if anyone films the movie with expensive and sturdy cameras and film or with cheap and fragile cameras and film” or “if anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God or words that are not acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3611CO312f8oagrammar-connect-condition-factεἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον1Here, Paul uses a conditional **if**, but he does not think that this is a hypothetical situation or something that is likely not true. Instead, Paul thinks that people are “building” on the foundation, and he wants to talk about how they are doing so. Additionally, the “then” part of the **if** statement does not begin until the next verse. If this form and structure would be misunderstood in your language, you could rephrase the condition into a circumstance or an assumption. Alternate translation: “people build on the foundation, using” or “when anyone builds on the foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
3621CO312tzgftranslate-unknownχρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην,1These six things are all materials that could be used in constructing buildings. The first three will survive if the building catches on fire, but the last three will not (for the fire, see [3:1315](../03/1315.md)). In your culture, you may not use all of these materials for constructing buildings. In that case, you could include just some of these materials or include materials that you do use for constructing buildings in your culture, making sure to include some materials will not burn up and others that will burn up. Alternate translation: “steel, concrete, lumber, or cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3631CO313ndu3figs-exmetaphorἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται; ἡ γὰρ ἡμέρα δηλώσει, ὅτι ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται; καὶ ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον, ὁποῖόν ἐστιν, τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ δοκιμάσει1For it will be revealed in fire. The fire will test the quality of what each one had doneHere, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He speaks as if **the day** of Gods judgment is like a fire that **will test** the building and show what kind of building materials the builders used. Paul speaks in this way to illustrate how Gods judgment will reveal whether what those who proclaim more about the gospel teach is pleasing to him or not. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the work of each one will become evident, for opening night will display it; for opening night always draws critics, and the critics will test of what value is the work of each one” or “the truth of what each one has taught you will become evident, for God will show how true it is when he comes to judge everyone; when he comes, he will judge everyone, and his judgment will reveal whether what each person has taught is true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3641CO313wv4hfigs-synecdocheἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον1Here, Paul uses the word translated **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for **work** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “what each one has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3651CO313t2mkfigs-activepassiveἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται1his work will be revealedIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea using words such as “God will reveal.” Alternate translation: “God will reveal the work of each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3661CO313mv14figs-explicitἡ…ἡμέρα δηλώσει1for the daylight will reveal itHere, Paul uses the word translated **day** in the same way the Old Testament uses it: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If that meaning of **day** would be misunderstood in your language, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by **day**. Alternate translation: “the day of Christs return will display” or “when Christ returns, he will display it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3671CO313lynyfigs-activepassiveἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται1If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God reveals it in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3681CO313x48swriting-pronounsἀποκαλύπτεται1Here, **it** refers to **the day**. It does not refer to the **work**. If the meaning of **it** would be misunderstood in your language, you clarify that **it** refers to **the day**. Alternate translation: “that day is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3691CO313ozx6ἀποκαλύπτεται1Here, Paul speaks as if the day **is revealed** right now. In his language, he can use the present tense to speak about the way in which something happens in general, even if it is not happening in the present moment. If this use of the present tense would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using the future tense. Alternate translation: “it will be revealed”
3701CO313rgfyἐν πυρὶ1Alternate translation: “with fire” or “in a fiery way”
3711CO314wexjfigs-hypoεἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.1Here and in [3:15](../03/15.md), Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a persons **work** might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work that he built will remain will receive a reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
3721CO314ygvafigs-exmetaphorεἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.1Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures survive a fire receive rewards. He speaks in this way to indicate that God will reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be accurate and acceptable to him when he judges everyone. The **reward** includes public recognition and other blessings. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone's film that he created receives good reviews on opening night, he will receive an award” or “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God, he will be honored by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3731CO314iddtfigs-explicitinfoτινος τὸ ἔργον…ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν1Here, Paul speaks both of **work** and what **he built**. If using both of these terms would be misunderstood or redundant in your language, you could combine the ideas into one expression. Alternate translation: “anyones building project” or “what anyone built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
3741CO314s4u3figs-synecdocheτὸ ἔργον1work remainsHere, Paul uses the word translated **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for **work** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3751CO314tec9μενεῖ1Alternate translation: “does not burn up”
3761CO314ge6sfigs-gendernotationsτινος…ἐποικοδόμησεν…λήμψεται1Here, the word translated **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyones … he or she built … he or she will receive” or “peoples … they built … they will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3771CO315vax6figs-hypoεἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται1Here, just as in [3:14](../03/14.md), Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a persons work might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work will be burned up will suffer loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
3781CO315ysjzfigs-exmetaphorεἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται; αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται, οὕτως δὲ ὡς διὰ πυρός.1Here, Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures do not survive a fire **suffer loss**. The builders themselves do not die, but they are in trouble, almost as if they were in the building and barely escaped as it burned to the ground. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that God will not reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be inaccurate and unacceptable to him when he judges everyone. The **loss** includes lack of honor and rewards from God. However, those who proclaim more about God in inaccurate and unacceptable ways are not condemned to punishment by God. Instead, just like someone escaping from a burning building, they are just barely accepted by God. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone's film that he created receives bad reviews on opening night, he will lose money on the film, but he himself will not face financial ruin, but as though through bankruptcy” or “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are not acceptable to God, he will receive no honor or blessing when God judges everyone, but he himself will be accepted by God, although just barely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3791CO315c2xjfigs-activepassiveτινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται1if anyones work is burned upIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with “fire” as the subject. Alternate translation: “fire burns up anyones work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3801CO315fyfrfigs-activepassiveτὸ ἔργον1Here, Paul uses the word translated **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If that meaning for **work** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3811CO315b2l8figs-gendernotationsτινος…ζημιωθήσεται…αὐτὸς…σωθήσεται1Here, the words translated **he** and **himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **he** and **himself** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyones … he or she will suffer loss … he himself or she herself will be saved” or “peoples … they will suffer loss … they themselves will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3821CO315ups4translate-unknownζημιωθήσεται1he will suffer lossThe phrase **he will suffer loss** expresses the opposite of “receiving a reward.” Instead of gaining honor and money, the person loses honor and money. If the phrase **he will suffer loss** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to losing honor and money. Alternate translation: “he will lose honor and money” or “he will be deprived of any reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3831CO315w1zvfigs-activepassiveαὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται1but he himself will be savedIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with **he** saving **himself** or **he** not perishing. Alternate translation: “but he will save himself” or “but he will not perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3841CO316uq2gfigs-rquestionοὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?1Do you not know that you are Gods temple and that the Spirit of God lives in you?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing by reminding them of something that they should already know. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “you know that you are a temple of God, and you know that the Spirit of God lives in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3851CO316yc1gfigs-exmetaphorοὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?1Here, Paul develops the metaphor about constructing a building in a new way. First, he says that the Corinthians together are **a temple of God**, which is a specific type of building. The **temple of God** was the place where God was present in a special way. Paul is thus identifying the Corinthians as people among whom God is present in the same kind of special way. Second, he says that the Corinthians together are the house or city in which the **Spirit of God lives**. The house or city in which someone lives is where they are always present. Paul is thus saying that the Holy Spirit is always present with the Corinthians. If the meaning of Pauls metaphors would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “Do you not know that you are the sacred shrine where God dwells, and you are the country in which the Spirit of God has residency?” or “Do you not know that God is present among you, and the Spirit of God is always with you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3861CO317pc0dfigs-exmetaphorεἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός; ὁ γὰρ ναὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς.1Here, Paul finishes the metaphor about the temple that he began in [3:16](../03/16.md). He notes that, because Gods temple is **holy**, God will **destroy** anyone who **destroys** the temple. He then again repeats that the Corinthians **are** the temple. By speaking in this way, Paul wishes to remind everyone among the Corinthian believers that “destroying” the unity of the believers is like “destroying” the **temple**, and God will act in response to this like he would if someone “destroyed” his **temple**. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone desecrates Gods sacred shrine, God will punish that person. For the sacred shrine is holy, and you are Gods sacred shrine” or “If anyone divides the place of Gods presence, God will punish that person. For wherever Gods presence can be found is holy, and you are the place where Gods presence can be found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
3871CO317pv8wfigs-hypoεἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός1Here, Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might destroy Gods temple, or that person might not. He then specifies the result for if someone does destroy Gods temple. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “God will destroy anyone who destroys the temple of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
3881CO317vcuvwriting-pronounsοἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς1Here, the word translated **which** could refer to: (1) **the temple of God**. Alternate translation: “which temple you are” (2) **holy**. Alternate translation: “and you too are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3891CO318glg8figs-imperativeμηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω…μωρὸς γενέσθω1Let no one deceive himselfIn this verse, Paul uses two third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a fool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
3901CO318s57sfigs-gendernotationsμηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω; εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός.1Here, the words translated **himself**, **he**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **himself**, **he**, and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using words that do not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “Let no one deceive himself or herself. If anyone among you thinks he or she is wise in this age, let him or her become a fool, that he or she may become wise” or “Let no people deceive themselves. If any people among you think they are wise in this age, them become fools, that they may become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3911CO318p3wifigs-hypoεἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω1in this ageHere, Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might think that **he is wise**, or that person might not think this. He then specifies the result for if someone does think that **he is wise**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Let whoever among you thinks he is wise in this age become a fool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
3921CO318p53yἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ1Alternate translation: “according to the standards of this age”
3931CO318s7xifigs-ironyμωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός1let him become a “fool”Here, Paul commands any **wise** person among the Corinthians to become a **fool**. He does not actually think that doing what he commands makes a person a **fool**, which is why **fool** appears in quotation marks. Rather, he knows that many will call doing what he commands becoming a **fool**. To make this clearer, he then says that becoming what many will call **a “fool”** will actually lead to becoming truly **wise**. If Pauls use of the word **fool** would be misunderstood by your readers, you could use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is speaking from the perspective of other people. Alternate translation: “let him become a so-called fool, that he may become truly wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
3941CO318pvt3translate-grammar-connect-logic-goalἵνα1Here, the word translated **that** introduces the goal or purpose for which a person should **become a “fool”**. If the meaning of **that** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
3951CO319m0gdfigs-possessionἡ…σοφία τοῦ κόσμου τούτου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **this world** considers to be **wisdom**. If **the wisdom of this world** would be not be understood in your language as **wisdom** from the perspective of **this world**, you could use a different form that makes this meaning clear. Alternate translation: “what this world considers to be wisdom” or “worldly wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3961CO319uqb3figs-idiomπαρὰ τῷ Θεῷ1Here, Paul uses the phrase **with God** to identify Gods perspective. If **with God** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that identifies that this is **foolishness** according to how God views the world. Alternate translation: “from Gods perspective” or “in Gods eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3971CO319ayvvwriting-quotationsγέγραπται γάρ1In Pauls culture, **For it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Job.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament” or “For the book of Job says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
3981CO319zws3figs-quotationsγέγραπται…ὁ δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν1He catches the wise in their craftinessIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that God catches the wise in their craftiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3991CO319wxz2figs-metaphorδρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν1Here, Paul speaks as if God reaches out and grabs **the wise** as they act in **craftiness**. By speaking in this way, he means that even “crafty” or clever people cannot avoid God when he wishes to “catch” them. God is not deceived, and he can disrupt their clever plans. If **catches** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “interrupts the clever plans of the wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4001CO319j0gafigs-nominaladjτοὺς σοφοὺς1Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “wise people” or “those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4011CO319x6tsfigs-abstractnounsτῇ πανουργίᾳ1If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **craftiness** by using a phrase such as “crafty plans” or “clever planning.” Alternate translation: “crafty plans” or “clever planning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4021CO320n5puwriting-quotationsκαὶ πάλιν1In Pauls culture, **And again** is a normal way to introduce another quotation from an important text that supports the same point. In this case, Paul quotes from the Old Testament book titled “Psalms.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing another quotation from an important text. Alternate translation: “It can be read in another place in the Old Testament” or “And the book of Psalms also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
4031CO320la6xfigs-quotationsΚύριος γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι1The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futileIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that the Lord knows the reasonings of the wise, that they are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
4041CO320gvyqfigs-explicitinfoγινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι1If the form **the reasonings of the wise, that they** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “knows that the reasonings of the wise are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
4051CO320ot38figs-abstractnounsτοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν1If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **reasonings** with a verb such as “reason” or “plan.” Alternate translation: “the things that the wise reason” or “the things that the wise plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4061CO320tlk9figs-nominaladjτῶν σοφῶν1Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of wise people” or “of those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4071CO320kz2uεἰσὶν μάταιοι1futileAlternate translation: “they will come to nothing” or “they are worthless”
4081CO321molufigs-imperativeμηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις1Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “no one should boast in men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
4091CO321xytifigs-idiomμηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις1The phrase **boast in men** means that a person is boasting “about” humans. If **boast in** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that the “boasting” has **men** as its content. Alternate translation: “let no one boast about men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4101CO321k9i3figs-explicitἐν ἀνθρώποις1The next verse makes it clear that here Paul specifically has leaders in mind. He wishes to tell the Corinthians that they should not boast about having a specific leader that they follow. If this meaning of **in men** would not be understood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that it refers to following leaders. Alternate translation: “in men that they follow” or “in men whose group they are part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4111CO321ogfqfigs-gendernotationsἀνθρώποις1Although the word translated men is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in people” or “in men or women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4121CO321g0hrfigs-explicitπάντα…ὑμῶν ἐστιν1Here, **all things are yours** also implies that **boasting in men** is foolish. If the Corinthians have everything, then boasting about following a specific leader does not make sense. All the Corinthians have all the leaders, and much more beyond that (see [3:22](../03/22.md)). If it would be misunderstood in your language that **all things are yours** implies these conclusions, you could include a phrase that states these conclusions. Alternate translation: “all things are yours, including all leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4131CO322lrlgtranslate-namesΠαῦλος…Ἀπολλῶς…Κηφᾶς1These are the names of three men. They are the same men who were mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) as leaders whom the Corinthians were claiming to follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4141CO322x1w6εἴτε Παῦλος, εἴτε Ἀπολλῶς, εἴτε Κηφᾶς, εἴτε κόσμος, εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος, εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα; 1Paul does not want his readers to think that this list tells the Corinthians everything that they have. Rather, he uses the list to give examples. If the use of this list would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a word or phrase that shows that the list gives examples. Alternate translation: “including Paul and Apollos and Cephas and the world and life and death and things present and things to come”
4151CO322o3k5figs-explicitεἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος1When Paul says that **life** and **death** are theirs, he means that neither **life** nor **death** has control over the Corinthians. Rather, they have control over **life** and **death**. What this means is that they can live their lives without being afraid of what will happen while they are alive or afraid of losing their lives when they die. If the meaning of the **life** and **death** would be misunderstood in your language, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or confidence in life or peace in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4161CO322pyirfigs-explicitεἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα1Here, Paul refers to **things present** because it refers to what was happening at the time when Paul wrote this letter. On the other hand, **things to come** refers to what is going to happen in the future, specifically when Jesus comes back. The **things present** is the way the world works right now. The **things to come** is the way the world will work when Jesus returns. If the meaning of these phrases would be misunderstood in your language, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or the current order or the order that Jesus will bring” or “or what happens now or what will happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4171CO322jt0xfigs-infostructureπάντα ὑμῶν1Here, Paul uses the same phrase he used at the end of [3:21](../03/21.md): **all things are yours**. He repeats the phrase here to explain that the list provides examples of **all things** and also to introduce the point he is about to make in the next verse. Because **all things are yours** ends the list and also introduces the next idea, the ULT begins a new sentence with **all things are yours**. Use whatever form in your language most clearly identifies a conclusion that also introduces the next statement. Alternate translation: “Thus, all things are yours,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
4181CO323nj48figs-possessionὑμεῖς…Χριστοῦ1you are Christs, and Christ is GodsHere, Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that they belong to Christ. If the meaning of this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belong to” or a verb such as “has.” Alternate translation: “you belong to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4191CO323dc6vfigs-possessionΧριστὸς…Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that **Christ** belongs to who **God** is. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “who God is includes Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4201CO4introvg5z0# 1 Corinthians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Pride<br><br>Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their “spiritual father.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### Irony<br><br>Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
4211CO41nkdafigs-explicitinfoοὕτως ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος ὡς1If the form **In this manner let a man regard us: as** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “Let a man regard us as” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo)
4221CO41k1v5figs-imperativeἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος1Connecting Statement:Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “a man should regard us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
4231CO41xt4ufigs-gendernotationsἄνθρωπος1Although the word translated **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “man or woman” or “human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4241CO41fk8cfigs-genericnounἄνθρωπος1Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If the meaning of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “everybody” or “any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
4251CO41px42figs-exclusiveἡμᾶς1Here, **us** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4261CO41if6tfigs-possessionοἰκονόμους μυστηρίων Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **stewards** who are in charge of **the mysteries of God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “manage” or “oversee.” Alternate translation: “stewards who manage the mysteries of God” or “stewards who oversee the mysteries of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4271CO41duabfigs-possessionμυστηρίων Θεοῦ1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **mysteries** that are: (1) revealed by **God**. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries given by God” or “of the mysteries from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries about God” or “of the mysteries concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4281CO42th8egrammar-connect-words-phrasesὧδε λοιπὸν1what is required of stewardsHere, Paul uses the phrase **In this case** to introduce further information about what it means to be **stewards**. Since he is talking about himself and others who proclaim the gospel as **stewards**, it is important to understand what it is that **stewards** are **required** to do. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information about a topic. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Speaking of stewards,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4291CO42de61figs-explicitζητεῖται ἐν τοῖς οἰκονόμοις, ἵνα πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ1While Paul does not directly apply this sentence to himself and others who proclaim the gospel, it is clear that he intends the reader to apply it to him and these others. Paul then means that he and others who proclaim the gospel are required to do so faithfully by God. If this implication would not be understood by your readers, you could a word or phrase that makes it clear by identifying Paul as one of the stewards. Alternate translation: “it is required in stewards like us that we be found faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4301CO42qek0figs-activepassiveζητεῖται1If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague subject or “masters” as the subject. Alternate translation: “people require” or “a master requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4311CO42dpeofigs-activepassiveπιστός τις εὑρεθῇ1If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague subject or “masters” as the subject. Alternate translation: “people find one faithful” or “a master finds one faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4321CO42yesrwriting-pronounsτις1Here, Paul uses **one** to refer to any of the **stewards**. If **one** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a plural pronoun such as “they.” Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4331CO43t133ἐμοὶ…ἐστιν1Alternate translation: “I consider it” or “from my perspective”
4341CO43fsppfigs-idiomεἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν1When Paul says that **it is a very small thing** for him to **be examined**, what he means is that their “examination” of him is unimportant to him. Whether they think he has been faithful or not does not matter to him at all. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “it is no big deal” or “it has no significance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4351CO43k6ncfigs-activepassiveὑφ’ ὑμῶν ἀνακριθῶ, ἢ ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας;1it is a very small thing that I should be judged by youIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “you or a human court would examine me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4361CO43l2tttranslate-unknownἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας1Here, the words translated **a human court** refer to an official legal proceeding where whether Paul was faithful or not could be judged by those in charge. Here, he uses the words primarily to refer to any people who are in charge of this legal proceeding. If this language would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to an official meeting to decide whether someone is innocent or guilty or a word or phrase that refers to who is in charge at such a meeting. Alternate translation: “a court of law” or “a human jury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4371CO43skwhgrammar-connect-words-phrasesἀλλ’1Here, the word translated **For** introduces an even stronger statement about how little Paul cares about being **examined** by humans. He cares so little that he does not even **examine** himself. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that normally introduces a further, stronger statement. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4381CO44u9jdfigs-idiomοὐδὲν…ἐμαυτῷ σύνοιδα1I am not aware of any charge being made against mePaul says that he is **aware of nothing against** himself. By this, he means that he does not know about anything that could be used to accuse him. He is not aware of anything he has done wrong. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I have a clear conscience” or “I cannot think of any wrong things I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4391CO44h3wlfigs-activepassiveοὐκ ἐν τούτῳ δεδικαίωμαι;1that does not mean I am innocent. It is the Lord who judges meIf you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “this does not justify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4401CO44bulowriting-pronounsτούτῳ1The word translated **this** refers back to the whole idea that Paul is **aware of nothing against** himself. If the meaning of **this** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers back to the whole previous statement. Alternate translation: “what I am aware of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4411CO44hjobgrammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1Paul uses the word translated **but** to introduce a contrast with everyone else who might “examine” Paul (see [4:34](../04/03.md)). If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast with several previous statements. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
4421CO44f6bbὁ…ἀνακρίνων με Κύριός ἐστιν.1Alternate translation: “the Lord is the one who judges me”
4431CO45qi3gfigs-explicitinfoπρὸ καιροῦ…ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ Κύριος1ThereforeIf the form **before the time, until the Lord comes** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to state in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “before the Lord comes” or “until the Lord comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
4441CO45wl3ifigs-metaphorὃς καὶ φωτίσει τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους1He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the purposes of the heartHere, Paul speaks as if **the Lord** will bring a flashlight or torch when he comes, and he will use that torch or flashlight to shine **light** on things that are currently **hidden** in the **darkness**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that **the Lord** will reveal what no person knows right now. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who will both disclose what people do not know about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4451CO45dcjefigs-possessionτὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are **hidden** in **darkness**. If the **hidden things** would not be understood to be in **darkness** in your language, you could express the idea by using a word such “in” or “within.” Alternate translation: “the things hidden in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4461CO45ywukfigs-abstractnounτὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους1If your language does not use the abstract noun **darkness**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes something that cannot be seen because there is no light, such as “in shadow.” Alternate translation: “the hidden things in shadow” or “the things hidden where no light shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4471CO45spwhfigs-possessionτὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **purposes** that come from or are created in **the hearts**. If it would be misunderstood in your language that **the purposes** are located in **the hearts**, you could express the idea by using a word such as “from” or “in.” Alternate translation: “the purposes in the hearts” or “the purposes from the hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4481CO45tgdgtranslate-unknownτὰς βουλὰς1Here, **purposes** refers to how humans have specific goals in mind and plan ways of attaining those goals. If the meaning of **purposes** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word such as “plans” or “intentions.” Alternate translation: “the plans” or “the intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4491CO45tgoxfigs-metonymyτῶν καρδιῶν1In Pauls culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. If that meaning of **hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “of the minds” or “that humans plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4501CO45pw6rfigs-idiomὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, Paul speaks as if **praise** were something that could **come** or travel from **God** to humans. Paul means that **God** is the source of the **praise** that **each one** will receive. If the meaning of this sentence would be misunderstood in your language, you could make **God** the person who gives the **praise**. Alternate translation: “God will give praise to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4511CO45kcyafigs-explicitὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, Paul seems to say that every person will receive some **praise** from **God**. However, Paul does not mean this. Instead, he only gives the example of the person who has been faithful to God, not the example of the person who has not been faithful to God. If using only one example would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that this example is only about those who are faithful, or you could include the opposite example about those who have been unfaithful. Alternate translation: “the praise from God will come to each faithful one” or “the praise and blame from God will come to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4521CO46agfzwriting-pronounsταῦτα1The word translated **these things** refers back to everything Paul has said about himself and Apollos in [3:423](../03/04.md). If what **these things** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers to what Paul has said about farming and building. Alternate translation: “what I have said about farming and building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4531CO46ijn5figs-gendernotationsἀδελφοί1brothersAlthough the word translated **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4541CO46xxp2translate-namesἈπολλῶν1This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4551CO46ymxifigs-exclusiveἡμῖν1Here, the word **us** refers to Paul and Apollos only. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4561CO46ziz9figs-quotationsμάθητε, τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται1for your sakesIf you your language does not use this form, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “you might learn not to go beyond what is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
4571CO46o02afigs-explicitτό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται,1Here, Paul quotes a short phrase that is not from the Old Testament but that would have been well-known to the Corinthians. The phrase **what is written** could refer to: (1) the Old Testament scriptures. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that the Old Testament approves of. Alternate translation: “Not beyond what the scriptures say” (2) general principles of life that everyone knows about. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that are generally approved and accepted. Alternate translation: “Not beyond proper standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4581CO46hk55figs-infostructureἵνα2The statement introduced by **so that** could be the purpose of (1) learning that they should not go **beyond what is written**. Alternate translation: “with the goal that” (2) Paul applying **these things** to himself and Apollos. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
4591CO46e79mfigs-activepassiveμὴ εἷς…φυσιοῦσθε1If your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with **no one** as the subject and the object. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4601CO46hjfuwriting-pronounsτοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑτέρου1The words translated **the one** and **the other** refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If the meaning of **the one** and **the other** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4611CO47fnu3figs-yousingularσε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών1between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had notIn this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
4621CO47gtb5figs-rquestionτίς…σε διακρίνει?1For who makes you superior?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4631CO47r6ywfigs-rquestionτί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες?1What do you have that you did not freely receive?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4641CO47eixwgrammar-connect-condition-factεἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες1Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
4651CO47e8l2figs-rquestionτί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών?1why do you boast as if you had not done so?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Pauls point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If this question would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea as an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4661CO47p0hgwriting-pronounsἔλαβες…λαβών2Here, both uses of **it** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **it** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you could use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4671CO48yp8sfigs-ironyἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε1General Information:With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthianss perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
4681CO48v77ufigs-metaphorκεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ1Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have had more than enough food to eat and beverages to drink. By this, he means that (they think that) they have so many spiritual blessings that there are no more that they can receive. If the meaning of **satisfied** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you are stuffed with blessings” or “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4691CO48uc7sfigs-metaphorἐπλουτήσατε1Here, Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have become wealthy people. He speaks in this way to again emphasize that (they think that) they have more spiritual blessings than they need. If the meaning of **become rich** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you have become fat” or “you have an excess of spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4701CO48mpirfigs-exclusiveἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς1Here, **us** and **we** refer to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4711CO49bb41grammar-connect-words-phrasesγάρ1God has put us apostles on displayHere, the word translated **For** introduces evidence that Paul and the other apostles are not “reigning” right now. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a contrast word such as “rather” or use a word or phrase that indicates that this sentence provides evidence that Paul is not “reigning.” Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “You can tell we are not reigning, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4721CO49v0bgtranslate-unknownδοκῶ1Here, the word translated **I think** introduces Pauls own opinion of what he and other **apostles** are meant to do and experience. If the meaning of **I think** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a persons interpretation or opinion. Alternate translation: “in my opinion,” or “it seems to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4731CO49lz8vfigs-exclusiveἡμᾶς…ἐγενήθημεν1Here, **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his fellow apostles. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4741CO49vfq3figs-metaphorἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ἐσχάτους ἀπέδειξεν, ὡς ἐπιθανατίους1has put us apostles on displayHere, Paul uses a metaphor that identifies himself and other apostles as those who receive public humiliation and are put to death. The metaphor itself: (1) could refer to a Roman gladiatorial contest. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** in the arena as part of the **last** event. As those who are **sentenced to death**, they would then die in this last event. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles in the last event of the gladiatorial games, in which we are destined to die” (2) could refer to a victory parade. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** at the end of the parade, or **last**. As the **last** prisoners, they are **sentenced to death**, and will be killed soon after the parade ends. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles at the end of the victory parade, in the place where prisoners who are sentenced to death march” (3) could be misunderstood in your language. If this is the case, you could express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “has chosen us apostles to be humiliated, and we are destined to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4751CO49ayu9translate-unknownἐσχάτους1The word translated **last of all** could identify: (1) the time when the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be as the last event held in the arena. Alternate translation: “at the end” (2) the place where the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be at the end of the victory parade. Alternate translation: “last in line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4761CO49e4i1figs-metaphorθέατρον ἐγενήθημεν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις1Here, Paul speaks as if he and other apostles were part of a gladiatorial game or a theatrical show. He speaks in this way to show that the humiliation and death he and other apostles suffer happens in public, with everyone watching to see what happens. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we live in full view of the world—both of angels and of men” or “we undergo these things publicly, before the world—both angels and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4771CO49cqh4figs-infostructureτῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις1to the world—to angels, and to human beingsThis structure could mean that: (1) Paul wants to define the **world** as **angels** and **men**. Alternate translation: “to the world, that is, both to angels and to men” (2) Paul is listing three different things. Alternate translation: “to the world, to angels, and to men.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
4781CO49d8dafigs-gendernotationsἀνθρώποις1Although the word translated **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to men and women” or “to people” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations)
4791CO410ds54figs-ellipsisἡμεῖς μωροὶ διὰ Χριστόν, ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι ἐν Χριστῷ; ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί; ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι1In Pauls language, he did not need to include the word translated **{are}**. However, many languages, including English, must add **{are}**, which is why the ULT includes it in brackets. If your language would not use **{are}** here, you could leave it unexpressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4801CO410johqfigs-exclusiveἡμεῖς-1Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4811CO410fkw2figs-ironyἡμεῖς μωροὶ…ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς…ἡμεῖς…ἄτιμοι1We are fools … in dishonorWith these statements, Paul identifies what he and the other apostles are like from the perspective of this world. They are **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. Paul does know that from Gods perspective they are actually “wise,” “strong,” and “honored.” However, he speaks from the perspective of this world to help the Corinthians change their thinking. Instead of wanting to be **wise**, **strong**, and **honored**, the Corinthians need to realize that following God will instead make them appear to this world as **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. If the meaning of these statements would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that they are spoken from a different perspective. Alternate translation: “We {seem to be} fools … We {seem to be} weak … we {seem to be} dishonored” or “According to the world, we {are} fools … According to the word, we {are} weak … according to the world, we {are} dishonored (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
4821CO410ufj2figs-ironyὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι…ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί…ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι1With these statements, Paul identifies what the Corinthians think about themselves. They think they are **wise**, **strong**, and **honored** from the perspective of this world. Paul contrasts what the Corinthians think about themselves and how he and other apostles look from the worlds perspective in order to make the Corinthians reconsider what they think about themselves. If these statements would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that they are spoken from the perspective of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “but you consider yourselves wise … but you consider yourselves strong … You consider yourselves honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
4831CO410wqh7figs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ1You are held in honorPaul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ” (2) the reason why God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4841CO410d1s9figs-infostructureὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι.1Paul changes the order of the last item in the list, putting **You** in front of **we**. In his culture, this is one way to identify the last item in a list. If the change in order would be misunderstood in your language, you could change the order to match the order Paul uses for the first two items. Alternate translation: “We {are} dishonored, but you {are} honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
4851CO411i298figs-idiomἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας1Up to this present hourIn Pauls culture, the phrase **Up to this present hour** means that what Paul is about to say has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “To this very day” “All the time we serve Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4861CO411k3f1figs-exclusiveπεινῶμεν1Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4871CO411hqcotranslate-unknownγυμνιτεύομεν1The word translated **are poorly clothed** means that the clothing is old and worn and barely covers a persons body. If the meaning of **are poorly clothed** would be misunderstood in your language, use a word or phrase that identifies clothing that barely covers a person. Alternate translation: “are clothed in rags” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4881CO411jj2yfigs-activepassiveκαὶ κολαφιζόμεθα, καὶ1we are brutally beatenIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “, and people brutally beat us, and we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4891CO411yhf4translate-unknownἀστατοῦμεν1we are homelessThe word translated **are homeless** means that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence or a house that they own. It does not mean that they never had a place to stay. If the meaning of **are homeless** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence. Alternate translation: “do not own homes” or “are always on the move” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4901CO412exfofigs-exclusiveἰδίαις…εὐλογοῦμεν…ἀνεχόμεθα1Here, the words **our** and **we** refer to Paul and other “apostles.” They do not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4911CO412ushffigs-doubletκοπιῶμεν, ἐργαζόμενοι1Here, the words **working hard** and **working** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both words to emphasize how **hard** he is working. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these words and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are working very hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4921CO412e0mzfigs-idiomἐργαζόμενοι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσίν1In Pauls culture, the phrase **with our own hands** indicates that Paul and other apostles were doing manual labor. In fact, we know that Paul himself made tents (see [Acts 18:3](../act/018/03.md)), so that is probably the manual labor which he refers to here. If **with our hands** would not refer to manual labor in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or an expression that refers to manual labor. Alternate translation: “doing physically demanding work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4931CO412z6fggrammar-connect-time-simultaneousλοιδορούμενοι…διωκόμενοι1The phrases **Being reviled** and **being persecuted** identify the situations in which Paul and other apostles **bless** and **endure**. If this relationship would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are reviled … any time we are persecuted” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are reviled … although we are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
4941CO412n389figs-activepassiveλοιδορούμενοι1When we are reviled, we blessIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others reviling us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4951CO412o7jztranslate-unknownλοιδορούμενοι1Here, the word translated **Being reviled** refers to someone abusing another person with words. If that meaning for **Being reviled** would not be obvious in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does refer to using abusive words about another person. Alternate translation: “Being slandered” or “Being attacked verbally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4961CO412l71qfigs-explicitεὐλογοῦμεν1Here, Paul does not state whom or what they **bless**. He could mean that they **bless**: (1) the people who “revile” them. Alternate translation: “we bless in return” (2) God, even though they are suffering. Alternate translation: “we bless God anyway” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4971CO412kue7figs-activepassiveδιωκόμενοι1When we are persecutedIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others persecuting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4981CO413xvn4figs-exclusiveπαρακαλοῦμεν…ἐγενήθημεν1Here, the word **we** refers to Paul and other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4991CO413l3nsgrammar-connect-time-simultaneousδυσφημούμενοι1The phrase **being slandered** identifies the situation in which Paul and other apostles **comfort**. If this relationship would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are slandered” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are slandered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
5001CO413a6hpfigs-activepassiveδυσφημούμενοι1When we are slanderedIf your language does not use this form, you could express the idea in active form, with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others slandering us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5011CO413p0fdfigs-simileὡς περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου ἐγενήθημεν, πάντων περίψημα1Here, Paul says that he and other apostles are like **scum** and **refuse**, both of which are words that describe garbage. Paul speaks in this way to show that **the world** considers him and other apostles to be worthless, just like garbage is worthless and should be thrown away. If the meaning of this simile would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable image or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “We have no value according to the worlds perspective” or “We have become like a heap of garbage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
5021CO413uubgfigs-doubletπερικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου…πάντων περίψημα1Here, Paul uses two different words for garbage. The word **scum** refers to what people throw away after they clean something. The word **refuse** refers to dirt or filth that people wipe or scrub off an object. Paul uses two very similar words in order to emphasize that the world thinks that he and other apostles are like garbage. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the filthy scum of all the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5031CO413gqxjfigs-possessionπερικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **the world** identifies as **scum**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a short phrase to clarify that **scum** is what **the world** thinks he and other apostles are. Alternate translation: “what the world considers scum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
5041CO413flf9figs-synecdocheτοῦ κόσμου1When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings who do not believe in Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of human beings” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche)
5051CO413ip6pfigs-possessionπάντων περίψημα1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **refuse** that: (1) comes from **all things**. Alternate translation: “the refuse from all things” (2) **all** people consider to be garbage. Alternate translation: “what all people consider to be refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
5061CO413z4ttfigs-idiomἕως ἄρτι1Here, Paul ends this sentence in a similar way to how he began his sentence in [4:11](../04/11.md). In Pauls culture, the phrase **even until now** means that what Paul speaks about has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to this very day” “all the time we serve Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5071CO414k1atfigs-infostructureοὐκ ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς γράφω ταῦτα, ἀλλ’ ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ, νουθετῶ1I do not write these things to shame you, but to correct youIf putting the negative statement before the positive statement would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “I correct {you} as my beloved children. I do not write these things as shaming you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
5081CO414r9pjgrammar-connect-logic-goalἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς1Here, the phrase **as shaming you** introduces what Paul did **not write** to do. If **as shaming** would be understood as a purpose in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does clearly indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
5091CO414nlzxwriting-pronounsταῦτα1The word translated **these things** refers back to what Paul has already written, focusing on [4:613](../04/06.md). If that meaning for **these things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers back to what Paul has just finished writing. Alternate translation: “what I have said about us apostles and you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5101CO414t8jcgrammar-connect-logic-resultὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ1correctHere, the phrase **as my beloved children** introduces (1) the reason why Paul corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because you are my beloved children” (2) the way in which he corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “as a father corrects his beloved children, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5111CO414ruu5figs-metaphorτέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ1my beloved childrenHere, Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were his **beloved children**. He speaks in this way because he is their spiritual father, the one who first preached the good news to them. Also, he loves them in the same way a father loves his own children. If Paul calling the Corinthians his **beloved children** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “my beloved younger siblings” or “fellow believers whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5121CO415ur1igrammar-connect-condition-contraryἐὰν…μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ1Here, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Corinthians do not have **myriads of guardians**, but he speaks in this way to emphasize that they have only one spiritual father, no matter how many **guardians** they have. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even if you somehow had myriads of guardians in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
5131CO415n8c1figs-hyperboleμυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς1ten thousand guardiansHere, **myriads of guardians** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of **guardians**. If that would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many guardians” or “a large number of guardians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5141CO415nkccfigs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ1Here, Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies: (1) that these **guardians** are helping the Corinthians in their union with Christ. Alternate translation: “who work to unite you more strongly to Christ” (2) the guardians as fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5151CO415d25xfigs-ellipsisοὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας1Here, Paul omits some words that may be essential in your language to create a complete thought. In English, these words are essential, so they have been included in the ULT in brackets. If you can translate this sentence without these words, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain these words as they appear in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
5161CO415yij4οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας1Alternate translation: “{you would have} only one father”
5171CO415j01tfigs-exmetaphorοὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας; ἐν γὰρ Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα.1Here, Paul speaks of himself as a “father” to the Corinthian believers. He became their father **through the gospel**, which means that he is their spiritual father. He is the one who preached the **gospel** to them when they became united to **Christ Jesus**, and that makes him the one who **fathered** them. If how Paul speaks about **fathers** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul refers to “spiritual” **fathers**. Alternate translation: “{you would} not {have} many spiritual fathers; for I fathered you spiritually in Christ Jesus through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
5181CO415m9ekfigs-metaphorἐν…Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ2I became your father in Christ Jesus through the gospelHere, Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) that the Corinthians became united to Christ when Paul preached the good news to them. Alternate translation: “when you were united to Christ Jesus” (2) Paul is their father in the Christian family, the family that is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “in the Christian family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5191CO417hi7wὅς ἐστίν μου τέκνον, ἀγαπητὸν καὶ πιστὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ1my beloved and faithful child in the Lord“whom I love and whom I teach about the Lord as if he were my own child”
5201CO418v4fnδέ1Now**Now** indicates that Paul is shifting his topic to rebuking the arrogant behavior of the Corinthian believers.
5211CO419jdk5ἐλεύσομαι…πρὸς ὑμᾶς1I will come to you“I will visit you”
5221CO421ix5gfigs-rquestionτί θέλετε?1What do you want?Paul was making a last appeal to the Corinthians, as he has been rebuking them for the errors they had made. Alternate translation: “Tell me what you want to happen now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5231CO421wv61figs-rquestionἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος?1Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?Paul is offering the Corinthians two opposing attitudes he could use when approaching them. Alternate translation: “If you want, I can come to punish you, or I can come to show you how much I love you by being gentle with you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5241CO421ix7lπραΰτητος1of gentleness“of kindness” or “of tenderness”
5251CO5introvb3l0# 1 Corinthians 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms<br><br>Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Dont you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
5261CO51e66c0Connecting Statement:Paul now specifically states about what sin of theirs he has heard, and how the Corinthian believers are proud of their acceptance of that man and his sin.
5271CO51dlj2figs-activepassiveἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν1which does not even exist among the GentilesYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that not even the Gentiles permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5281CO51b9xnγυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν1a man has his fathers wife“a man among you is committing adultery with his fathers wife”
5291CO51lxp1γυναῖκά…πατρὸς1fathers wifethe wife of his father, but probably not his own mother
5301CO52rr93figs-activepassiveἵνα ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας1The one who did this must be removed from among youYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and remove the one who did this from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5311CO53xm4eπαρὼν…τῷ πνεύματι1I am present in spiritBeing with them **in spirit** represents caring about them or wanting to be with them. Alternate translation: “I care about you” or “I want to be with you”
5321CO53ax3uἤδη κέκρικα…τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον1I have already passed judgment on the one who did thisThis could mean: (1) Paul has decided what they should do with the one who did this. (2) Paul has found the person who did this guilty.
5331CO54m9yzσυναχθέντων ὑμῶν1When you are assembled“When you are together” or “When you meet together”
5341CO54t83dfigs-metonymyἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ1in the name of our Lord JesusThis could mean: (1) the **name** of the Lord Jesus is a metonym that represents his authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus” (2) being assembled in the Lords **name** implies meeting together to worship him. Alternate translation: “to worship our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5351CO55xcf6figs-metaphorπαραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον τῷ Σατανᾷ1hand this man over to SatanTo **hand the man over to Satan** represents not allowing the man to be part of their group so that Satan would be allowed to harm him. Alternate translation: “make this man leave your group so that Satan can harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5361CO55nq4yfigs-metaphorεἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός1for the destruction of the fleshHere, **flesh** could be: (1) a reference to his physical body. Alternate translation: “so that Satan may harm his body” (2) a metaphor for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “so that his sinful nature will be destroyed” or “so that he will not continue to live according to his sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5371CO55z2clfigs-activepassiveἵνα τὸ πνεῦμα σωθῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου1so that his spirit may be saved on the day of the LordYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that God may save his spirit on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5381CO56h2hkοὐ καλὸν τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν1Your boasting is not good“Your boasting is bad”
5391CO56n9w0figs-rquestionοὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ?1You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should know that a little yeast will affect the whole loaf!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5401CO56ng4mfigs-metaphorμικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ1Do you not know that a little yeast leavens the whole loaf?Just as a little yeast spreads throughout a whole loaf of bread, so can a little sin impact the entire fellowship of believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5411CO57ret3figs-metaphorκαὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός1Christ, our Passover lamb, has been sacrificedAs the Passover lamb covered the sins of Israel by faith each year, so did Christs death cover the sins of all who trust in Christ by faith for eternity. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5421CO57yzjlfigs-activepassiveκαὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός1You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord has also sacrificed Christ, our Passover lamb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5431CO510taf5τοῖς πλεονέκταις1the greedy“those who are greedy” or “those who are willing to be dishonest to get what others have”
5441CO510hu63ἅρπαξιν1swindlerspeople who cheat to get others property
5451CO510m59jὠφείλετε…ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελθεῖν1you would need to go out of the world“you would need to avoid every person”
5461CO511wcm20Connecting Statement:Paul tells them how to treat believers in the church who refuse to be corrected for their involvement in sexual immorality and other obvious sins before others.
5471CO511w9w8figs-activepassiveτις…ὀνομαζόμενος1anyone who is calledYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “anyone who calls himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5481CO511b4usἀδελφὸς1brotherHere, **brother** means a fellow Christian, either a man or a woman.
5491CO512xeu7figs-rquestionτί…μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν?1how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church?Paul is emphasizing that he is not the one **to judge** people outside the church. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am not the one who should judge people who do not belong to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5501CO512m4s6figs-rquestionοὐχὶ τοὺς ἔσω ὑμεῖς κρίνετε?1Are you not to judge those inside?Paul is scolding the Corinthians. “You should know that you are the ones who should judge those who are inside the church.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5511CO6intros6hb0# 1 Corinthians 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Lawsuits<br><br>Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
5521CO61hv790Connecting Statement:Paul then explains how believers are to settle disagreements with other believers.
5531CO61q5d3πρᾶγμα1disputea disagreement or argument
5541CO61gmy5figs-rquestionτολμᾷ τις ὑμῶν, πρᾶγμα ἔχων πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον, κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν ἀδίκων, καὶ οὐχὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἁγίων?1does he dare to go … saints?Paul is emphasizing that Christians must resolve disagreements among themselves. Alternate translation: “None of you should dare, having a dispute with another, to go to court before the unrighteous, and not before the saints!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5551CO62i1m5figs-rquestionἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν?1Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world?Paul is shaming the Corinthians for acting like they do not know. Alternate translation: “You should know that the saints will judge the world!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5561CO62i67ffigs-rquestionκαὶ εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος, ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων?1If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance?Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “And you will judge the world in the future, so you should be able to settle this matter now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5571CO63h374βιωτικά1matters of this life“things that only have to do with this life”
5581CO63us55figs-rquestionοὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν, μήτι γε βιωτικά?1Do you not know that we will judge the angels?Paul is surprised that they do not seem to know. Alternate translation: “You should know that we will judge the angels. So of course you should be able to judge matters of this life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5591CO63v5r5figs-exclusiveκρινοῦμεν1we will judgeHere, **we** includes Paul and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5601CO63x6h3figs-rquestionοὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν, μήτι γε βιωτικά?1How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life?Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “Because we know we will judge the angels, we can also be sure that God will enable us to judge matters in this life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5611CO64vw5tfigs-rquestionβιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?1If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?This could be: (1) a rhetorical question. (2) a statement, “When in the past you have settled matters that are important in this life, you have not handed off disputes between Christians to be settled by unbelievers.” (3) a command, “When you settle matters that are important in this life, it is even to those who have no standing in the church that you should hand off disputes to be settled!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5621CO64xn32βιωτικὰ…κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε1If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life“if you are called upon to make decisions about daily life” or “if you must settle matters that are important in this life”
5631CO64e791figs-rquestionτοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?1why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?Paul is rebuking the Corinthians for how they are handling these cases. This could mean: (1) they should stop giving such cases to people who are outside the church. (2) they should give such cases even to members of the church who are not well regarded by other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5641CO65fue4figs-rquestionπρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν λέγω. οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδεὶς σοφὸς, ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ?1Is there no one among you wise enough to settle a dispute between brothers?Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You should be ashamed that you cannot find a wise believer among you to settle arguments between believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5651CO65b2vyπρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν1to your shame“to your dishonor” or “to show how you have failed in this matter”
5661CO65l1hdτοῦ ἀδελφοῦ1brothersHere, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
5671CO66m7lsfigs-rquestionἀλλὰ ἀδελφὸς μετὰ ἀδελφοῦ κρίνεται, καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων?1But brother goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But believers who have disputes with each other ask unbelieving judges to make decisions for them!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5681CO67tn9mfigs-rquestionδιὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθε? διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀποστερεῖσθε?1Why not rather suffer the wrong? Why not rather allow yourselves to be cheated?Paul continues to shame the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “It would be better to let others wrong you and cheat you than to take them to court.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5691CO68kk7bἀδελφούς1your own brothersHere, **brothers** refers to all believers, both men and women. Alternate translation: “your own fellow believers”
5701CO69h17lfigs-rquestionἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἄδικοι Θεοῦ Βασιλείαν οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν?1Or do you not know thatPaul emphasizes that they should already know this truth. Alternate translation: “You already know that he unrighteous will not inherit the kingdom of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5711CO69t1rtfigs-metaphorκληρονομήσουσιν1will inheritReceiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5721CO69h2nafigs-merismμαλακοὶ…ἀρσενοκοῖται1male prostitutes, those who practice homosexualityThese phrases could be: (1) a merism for all homosexual activity. (2) two different activities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
5731CO69blc7μαλακοὶ…ἀρσενοκοῖται1male prostitutesThese phrases could refer to: (1) men who allow other men to sleep with them. (2) men who allow men who pay them to sleep with them. (3) men who allow other men to sleep with them as part of a religious activity.
5741CO610bgj9πλεονέκται1the greedypeople who are willing to use evil means to take others property
5751CO611v5yqfigs-activepassiveἀπελούσασθε1you have been cleansedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has cleansed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5761CO611u8klfigs-activepassiveἡγιάσθητε1you have been sanctifiedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God set you apart for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5771CO611gnr6figs-activepassiveἐδικαιώθητε1you were justifiedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God made you right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5781CO611s55xfigs-metonymyἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1in the name of the Lord Jesus ChristHere, **name** is a metonym for the power and authority of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by the power and authority of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5791CO612sw2e0Connecting Statement:Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that God wants them pure because Christ has bought them with his death. Their bodies are now Gods temple. He does so by saying what the Corinthians might say and then correcting them.
5801CO612r4mxπάντα μοι ἔξεστιν1Everything is lawful for meThis could mean: (1) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” (2) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, I can do anything.”
5811CO612c8vzfigs-activepassiveοὐκ ἐγὼ ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό τινος1I will not be mastered by any of themYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will not allow these things to rule over me like a master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5821CO613jz55τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν; ὁ δὲ Θεὸς καὶ ταύτην καὶ ταῦτα καταργήσει1“Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but God will do away with both of themThis could mean: (1) Paul is correcting what some Corinthians might be thinking, “food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” by answering that God will do away with both the stomach and food. (2) Paul actually agrees that “food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but he is adding that God will do away with both of them.
5831CO613uc1vκαταργήσει1do away with“destroy”
5841CO614ev9lτὸν Κύριον ἤγειρεν1raised the Lord“caused the Lord to live again”
5851CO615gt2xfigs-metaphorοὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν μέλη Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?1Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ?The word translated as **members** refers to parts of a body. Our belonging to Christ is spoken of as if we were parts of his body. We belong to him so much that even our bodies belong to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5861CO615io5pfigs-rquestionοὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν μέλη Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?1Paul uses this question to remind the people of something they should already know. Alternate translation: “You should know that your bodies are part of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5871CO615f4vdfigs-rquestionἄρας οὖν τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ποιήσω πόρνης μέλη? μὴ γένοιτο!1Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!Paul uses this question to emphasize how wrong it is for someone who belongs to Christ to go to a prostitute. Alternate translation: “I am part of Christ. I will not take my body and join myself to a prostitute!” or “We are parts of Christs body. We must not take our bodies and join ourselves to prostitutes!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5881CO615kmt2μὴ γένοιτο1May it not be!“That should never happen!” or “We must never do that!”
5891CO616seg6figs-rquestionἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν?1Do you not know that … her?Paul begins to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing a truth that they already know. “I want to remind you the one who is joined to the prostitute is one body with her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5901CO616z54kfigs-activepassiveὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν1he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with herYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when a man joins his body to the body of a prostitute, it is as if their bodies become one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5911CO617c2tbfigs-activepassiveὁ…κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ, ἓν πνεῦμά ἐστιν1he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with himYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the Lord joins his spirit to the spirit of a person, it is as if their spirits become one spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5921CO618ex92figs-metaphorφεύγετε τὴν πορνείαν1Flee fromPaul speaks of a person rejecting sexual sin as if that person were running away from danger. Alternate translation: “Get away from sexual sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5931CO618sc9dfigs-explicitπᾶν ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ πορνεύων εἰς τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα ἁμαρτάνει1immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, butThis could mean: (1) Paul is showing that sexual sin is especially bad because it is not only against others but against the sinners own body. (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “immorality! Some of you are saying, Every sin that a person commits is outside the body, but I say that the one who is sexually immoral sins against his own body.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5941CO618jr46ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος1sin that a person commits“evil deed that a person does”
5951CO619qy5jfigs-rquestionἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν, ναὸς τοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν Ἁγίου Πνεύματός ἐστιν, οὗ ἔχετε ἀπὸ Θεοῦ?1Do you not know … God? … that you are not your own?Paul is continuing to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing what they already know. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that your body is a temple of the Holy Spirit in you, whom you have from God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5961CO619bb35τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν1your bodythe **body** of each individual Christian
5971CO619d2mcfigs-metaphorναὸς τοῦ…Ἁγίου Πνεύματός1temple of the Holy SpiritA **temple** is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, each Corinthian believers body is like a temple because the Holy Spirit is present within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5981CO620qv47figs-activepassiveἠγοράσθητε γὰρ τιμῆς1For you were bought with a priceGod paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “for God paid for your freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5991CO620y7feδὴ1Therefore“Because what I have just said is true”
6001CO7introa25m0# 1 Corinthians 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Divorce<br><br>Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms<br><br>Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
6011CO71iue70Connecting Statement:Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage.
6021CO71y4lxδὲ1NowPaul is introducing a new topic in his teaching.
6031CO71jq21ὧν ἐγράψατε1the issues you wrote aboutThe Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions.
6041CO71erl5καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι1“It is good for a man not to touch a woman.”This could mean: (1) Paul is quoting what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “you wrote, It is good for a man not to touch a woman.’” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks. Alternate translation: “my answer is that yes, it is good for a man not to touch a woman.”
6051CO71ui5cκαλὸν1It is good“It is most helpful”
6061CO71cm7yἀνθρώπῳ1for a manHere, **a man** could refer to: (1) a married man. Alternate translation: “a husband” (2) any man.
6071CO71mx7wfigs-euphemismγυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι1not to touch a womanHere, **touch a woman** is a euphemism for having sexual relations, upon which Paul elaborates in verses 3-5. However, it is also clear from verse 2 that Paul is specifically talking about sexual relations between a husband and his wife. Alternate translation: “not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
6081CO72c3uqδιὰ δὲ1But becauseThis could mean: (1) Paul is responding to what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “That is true, but because” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks.
6091CO72fys4διὰ δὲ τὰς πορνείας1But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each“But because Satan tempts people to commit sexual sin” or “But we desire to commit sexual sin because of our sinful nature”
6101CO73mj8lfigs-euphemismὀφειλὴν1sexual rightsBoth husbands and wives are obligated to regularly have sexual relations with their spouses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
6111CO73vhv1figs-ellipsisὁμοίως…καὶ ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί1likewise the wife to her husbandThe words “should give” and “sexual rights” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “likewise the wife should give to her husband his sexual rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
6121CO75qq7ufigs-explicitμὴ ἀποστερεῖτε ἀλλήλους1Do not deprive each otherThe word **deprive** means to keep from someone something that the other person has the right to receive. “Do not refuse to have marital relations with your spouse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6131CO75uq6xἵνα σχολάσητε τῇ προσευχῇ1so that you may devote yourselves to prayerin order to have a period of especially deep prayer
6141CO75s1yaπάλιν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἦτε1come together again“sleep together again”
6151CO75ii8nδιὰ τὴν ἀκρασίαν ὑμῶν1because of your lack of self-control“because after some days, your sexual desires will be harder to keep under control”
6161CO76xe7rτοῦτο δὲ λέγω κατὰ συνγνώμην, οὐ κατ’ ἐπιταγήν1I say these things to you as a concession and not as a commandThis could mean: (1) Paul is telling the Corinthians that he is allowing them, but not commanding them, to marry and sleep together. (2) Paul is telling the Corinthians that he is allowing them, but not commanding them, to stop sleeping together for a time.
6171CO77rbe7εἶναι ὡς καὶ ἐμαυτόν1were as I amEither Paul had never married or his wife had died. It is unlikely that he had been through a divorce.
6181CO77w9ldἀλλὰ ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα ἐκ Θεοῦ; ὁ μὲν οὕτως, ὁ δὲ οὕτως1But each one has his own gift from God. One has this kind of gift, and another that kind“God enables people to do different things. He enables one person to do one thing and another person to do something different”
6191CO78r27xκαλὸν1it is goodSee how you translated **good** in [1 Corinthians 7:1](../07/01.md).
6201CO79ty79πυροῦσθαι1to burn with desire“to live with the constant desire to sleep with someone”
6211CO710hc5pἀπὸ…μὴ χωρισθῆναι1should not separate fromPauls readers knew no difference between separating and divorcing. To stop living with someone was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: “should not divorce”
6221CO711lxf7figs-activepassiveτῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω1be reconciled to her husbandYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “she should make peace with her husband and return to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6231CO711jd5wμὴ ἀφιέναι1should not divorcePauls readers knew no difference between divorcing and simply separating. To do either was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: “should not separate from”
6241CO712k9ydσυνευδοκεῖ1agrees“is willing” or “is satisfied”
6251CO713mw6kἄνδρα1husbandThe word translated as **husband** is the same Greek word as for “man.”
6261CO714l84pfigs-activepassiveἡγίασται γὰρ ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί1For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wifeThis could mean: (1) God has set apart the unbelieving husband for himself because of his believing wife. (2) God treats the unbelieving husband as he would treat a son for the sake of his believing wife. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6271CO714w5y9figs-activepassiveἡγίασται ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ1the unbelieving wife is set apart because of the brotherThis could mean: (1) God has set apart the unbelieving wife for himself because of her husband who believes. (2) God treats the unbelieving wife as he would treat a daughter for the sake of her husband who believes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6281CO714i1x4τῷ ἀδελφῷ1the brotherthe believing husband
6291CO714fmu5figs-activepassiveἅγιά ἐστιν1they are set apartThis could mean: (1) God has set them apart for himself. (2) God treats them as he would treat his own children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6301CO715jef4figs-metaphorοὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις1In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vowsHere, **brother** and **sister** refers to a Christian husband or wife. Here, **not bound to their vows** is a metaphor that mean the person is not obligated to do what they vowed to do. Alternate translation: “In such cases, the believing spouse is not obligated to continue to obey the marriage vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6311CO715q6k2figs-activepassiveοὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις1You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “In such cases, God does not require the believing spouse to continue to obey the marriage vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6321CO716l559figs-youοἶδας, γύναι…τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις…οἶδας, ἄνερ…τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις1do you know, woman … you will save your husband … do you know, man … you will save your wifePaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of **you** and **your** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
6331CO716h5tdfigs-rquestionτί γὰρ οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις?1how do you know, woman, whether you will save your husband?Paul uses a question to cause women to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “For you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving husband.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6341CO716dbz6figs-rquestionἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?1how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?Paul uses a question to cause men to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “And you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6351CO717ya76ἑκάστῳ1each one“to each believer”
6361CO717iid2οὕτως ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις πάσαις διατάσσομαι1I direct in this way in all the churchesPaul was teaching believers **in all the churches** to act in this manner.
6371CO718unc4figs-rquestionπεριτετμημένος τις ἐκλήθη?1Was anyone called when he was circumcised?Paul was addressing the circumcised ones (the Jews). Alternate translation: “I am now speaking to the circumcised ones who had already been circumcised when God called you to believe.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6381CO718fqv6figs-rquestionἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ κέκληταί τις?1Was anyone called in uncircumcision?Paul was now addressing the uncircumcised ones. Alternate translation: “I am now speaking to the uncircumcised ones who had not been circumcised when God called you to believe.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6391CO720yy8lfigs-exclusive0General Information:Here the words **us** and **we** refer to all Christians and include Pauls audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6401CO720hsz1ἐν τῇ κλήσει ᾗ ἐκλήθη, ἐν ταύτῃ μενέτω1in the calling … he should remainHere, **calling** refers to the work or social position in which you were involved. Alternate translation: “live and work in the same condition as when God called you to believe”
6411CO721ag5afigs-youἐκλήθης…σοι…δύνασαι1Were you … called you? Do not be … you can becomePaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of **you** and the command **be** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
6421CO721nli9figs-rquestionδοῦλος ἐκλήθης? μή σοι μελέτω1Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concernedYou can state this as a statement. Alternate translation: “To those who were slaves when God called you to believe, I say this: do not be concerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6431CO722l6vqἀπελεύθερος Κυρίου1the Lords freemanThis **freedman** is forgiven by God and therefore free from Satan and sin.
6441CO723m53pfigs-activepassiveτιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε1You have been bought with a priceYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Christ bought you by dying for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6451CO724qu1lἀδελφοί1BrothersHere, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
6461CO724c83efigs-activepassiveἐκλήθη1was calledYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he was when God called him to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6471CO725f71aπερὶ δὲ τῶν παρθένων, ἐπιταγὴν Κυρίου οὐκ ἔχω1Now concerning those who never married, I have no commandment from the LordPaul knows no teaching of Jesus that speaks about this situation. Alternate translation: “The Lord has not commanded me to say anything to people who have never married”
6481CO725vaa4γνώμην…δίδωμι1I give my opinion“I tell you what I think”
6491CO725qqz7ὡς ἠλεημένος ὑπὸ Κυρίου, πιστὸς εἶναι1as one who, by the Lords mercy, is trustworthy“because, by the Lords mercy, I am trustworthy”
6501CO727a77xfigs-you0General Information:Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if he were speaking to each person, so all these instances of “you” and the command “do not seek” here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
6511CO727k9tdfigs-rquestionδέδεσαι γυναικί? μὴ ζήτει1Are you married to a wife? Do notPaul uses this question to introduce a possible condition. You can translate the question as a phrase with “if.” Alternate translation: “If you are married, do not seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6521CO727x2lkμὴ ζήτει λύσιν1Do not seek a divorce“Do not try to divorce her” or “Do not separate from her”
6531CO727d79cμὴ ζήτει…γυναῖκα2do not seek a wife“Do not try to get married”
6541CO728whf5figs-explicitἐγὼ…ὑμῶν φείδομαι1I want to spare you from thisThe word **this** refers to the kinds of worldly trouble that married people might have. Alternate translation: “I want to help you not to have worldly trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6551CO729r594ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν1The time is short“There is little time” or “Time is almost gone”
6561CO730vm8kοἱ κλαίοντες1those who weeppeople who cry or grieve with tears
6571CO731t41vοἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κόσμον1those using the world“those who deal every day with unbelievers”
6581CO731jl2rὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι1as though they were not using it“should show by their actions that they have their hope in God”
6591CO732t4abfigs-idiomἀμερίμνους1free from worriesHere, **free** is an idiom which means the ability to live without constantly thinking about.” Alternate translation: “without needing to worry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6601CO732d4zdμεριμνᾷ1concerned about“is focused on”
6611CO734ug6nἡ δὲ γαμήσασα μεριμνᾷ τὰ τοῦ κόσμου, πῶς ἀρέσῃ τῷ ἀνδρί1is concerned about“But the married woman is trying to please God and please her husband at the same time”
6621CO735rp3wβρόχον1constraintany restriction
6631CO735ffx4εὐπάρεδρον τῷ Κυρίῳ1devoted“can concentrate on the Lord”
6641CO736jn8jἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ1he is acting improperly toward“his is not being kind to” or “his is not honoring”
6651CO736crb8τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ1his virginHere, **his virgin** could refer to: (1) the woman whom he promised to marry. (2) his virgin daughter.
6661CO736wdj5γαμείτωσαν1let them marryThis could mean: (1) he should marry his fiancée. (2) he should let his daughter get married.
6671CO737nm99figs-metaphorὃς δὲ ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος1But if he is standing firm in his heartHere, **standing firm** is a metaphor for deciding something with certainty. Alternate translation: “But if he has decided firmly in his own heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6681CO737uthlfigs-metonymyἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ1Here, **heart** is metonym for a persons mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: “in his own mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6691CO739d413figs-metaphorγυνὴ δέδεται ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς1A wife is bound for as long as her husband livesHere, **bound** is a metaphor for a close relationship between people in which they support each other emotionally, spiritually, and physically. Here it means the union of marriage. Alternate translation: “A woman is married to her husband” or “A woman is united with her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6701CO739ms7zἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς1for as long as … lives“until her husband dies”
6711CO739y6rzᾧ θέλει1whomever she wishes“anyone she wants”
6721CO739rr2dἐν Κυρίῳ1in the Lord“if the new husband is a believer”
6731CO740hwz4τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην1my judgment“my understanding of Gods word”
6741CO740hd7fμακαριωτέρα1happiermore contented, more joyful
6751CO740pse4οὕτως μείνῃ1lives as she is“if she would remain unmarried”
6761CO8introc8l60# 1 Corinthians 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Meat sacrificed to idols<br><br>Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
6771CO81jf6hfigs-exclusive0General Information:**We** and **we** refer to Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, include all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6781CO81nzt40Connecting Statement:Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ.
6791CO81cep1περὶ δὲ1Now aboutPaul uses the phrase **Now about** to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him.
6801CO81g5t3τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων1food sacrificed to idolsGentile worshipers would offer grain, fish, fowl, or meat, to their gods. The priest would burn a portion of it on the altar. Paul is speaking of the portion the priest would give back for the worshiper to eat or sell in the market.
6811CO81ri3sfigs-metaphorἡ γνῶσις φυσιοῖ1Knowledge puffs upHere, **puffs up** is a metaphor for making someone proud. Alternate translation: “Knowledge makes people proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6821CO81ytrffigs-abstractnounsἡ γνῶσις φυσιοῖ,1The abstract noun **knowledge** can be expressed with the verb “know.” Alternate translation: “People who think that they know a lot become proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6831CO81yw8sfigs-abstractnounsἡ δὲ ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ1but love builds upThe abstract noun **love** can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “but when we love people, we build them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6841CO81an8sfigs-metaphorἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ1love builds upBuilding people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. Alternate translation: “love strengthens people” or “when we love people, we strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6851CO82qbh9δοκεῖ ἐγνωκέναι τι1thinks he knows something“believes he knows everything about something”
6861CO83etd6figs-activepassiveοὗτος ἔγνωσται ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ1that person is known by himYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God knows that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6871CO84v4gxfigs-exclusive0General Information:“We” and “us” here refer to all believers and include Pauls audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6881CO84y3eefigs-explicitοἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς1We know that an idol in this world is nothing and that there is no God but onePaul is probably quoting phrases that some Corinthians used. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6891CO84g67gfigs-metaphorοἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς1Being **nothing** represents having no power. Alternate translation: “We all know, as you yourselves like to say, that an idol in this world has no power and that there is no God but one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6901CO85sl8jλεγόμενοι θεοὶ1so-called gods“things that people call gods”
6911CO85l7ibθεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί1many “gods” and many “lords.”Paul does not believe that many **gods** and many **lords** exist, but he recognizes that the pagans believe they do.
6921CO86y6hqἀλλ’ ἡμῖν εἷς Θεὸς1Yet for us there is only one God“yet we know that there is only one God”
6931CO87th5p0General Information:Paul is speaking here of **weak** brothers, people who cannot separate food sacrificed to idols from the worship of those idols. If a Christian eats food that has been sacrificed to an idol, weak brothers might think that God will allow them to worship the idol by eating the food. Even if the eater has not worshiped the idol and is simply eating the food, he has still corrupted his weak brothers conscience.
6941CO87v7ltπᾶσιν…τινὲς1everyone … some“all people … some people who are now Christians”
6951CO87ba7eμολύνεται1is defiledis ruined or harmed
6961CO88ii4mfigs-personificationβρῶμα…ἡμᾶς οὐ παραστήσει τῷ Θεῷ1food will not present us to GodPaul speaks of **food** as though it were a person who could make God welcome us. Alternate translation: “food does not give us favor with God” or “the food we eat does not make God pleased with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
6971CO88x91vfigs-doublenegativesοὔτε ἐὰν μὴ φάγωμεν, ὑστερούμεθα; οὔτε ἐὰν φάγωμεν, περισσεύομεν1We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat itYou can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Some people might think that if we do not eat some things, God will love us less. But they are wrong. Those who think that God will love us more if we do eat those things are also wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
6981CO89f3dsτοῖς ἀσθενέσιν1those who are weakfor believers who are not strong in their faith
6991CO810usg7figs-youἴδῃ τὸν ἔχοντα1sees the one who hasPaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so **the one** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7001CO810i6ejἡ συνείδησις αὐτοῦ1his … consciencewhat he understands to be right and wrong
7011CO810x5paοἰκοδομηθήσεται, εἰς τὸ…ἐσθίειν1built up so as to eat“will … be encouraged to eat”
7021CO811ez6tfigs-youτῇ σῇ γνώσει1your knowledgePaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7031CO811g5tnἀπόλλυται…ὁ ἀσθενῶν1the one who is weak … is destroyedThe brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith.
7041CO813i8tbδιόπερ1Therefore“Because what I have just said is true”
7051CO813vf92figs-metonymyεἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου1if food causes to stumbleHere, **food** is a metonym for the person eating the food. Alternate translation: “if I cause by eating” or “if I, because of what I eat, cause my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7061CO9introz8d40# 1 Corinthians 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Earning money from the church<br><br>People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Contextualization<br><br>This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
7071CO91fu7x0Connecting Statement:Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ.
7081CO91mdm4figs-rquestionοὐκ εἰμὶ ἐλεύθερος?1Am I not free?Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am a free person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7091CO91dbp9figs-rquestionοὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος?1Am I not an apostle?Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am an apostle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7101CO91re1tfigs-rquestionοὐχὶ Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν ἑόρακα?1Have I not seen Jesus our Lord?Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is. Alternate translation: “I have seen Jesus our Lord.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7111CO91zd7efigs-rquestionοὐ τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ?1Are you not my workmanship in the Lord?Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of their relationship to him. Alternate translation: “You believe in Christ because I have worked the way the Lord wants me to.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7121CO92j6qzfigs-metonymyἡ…σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς, ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ1you are the proof of my apostleship in the LordHere, **proof** is a metonym for the evidence needed to prove something. Alternate translation: “you are evidence I can use to prove that the Lord has chosen me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7131CO93b17xἡ ἐμὴ ἀπολογία τοῖς ἐμὲ ἀνακρίνουσίν ἐστιν αὕτη1This is my defense … me:This could mean: (1) the words that follow are Pauls defense. (2) the words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Pauls defense.
7141CO94mr4gfigs-rquestionμὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν?1Do we not have the right to eat and drink?Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We have the absolute right to receive food and drink from the churches.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7151CO94p4vqfigs-exclusiveἔχομεν1we … haveHere, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7161CO95s9k8figs-rquestionμὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν ἀδελφὴν, γυναῖκα περιάγειν, ὡς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπόστολοι, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ Κηφᾶς?1Do we not have the right to take along with us a wife who is a believer, as do the rest of the apostles, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas?Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “If we have believing wives, we have a right to take them with us just as the other apostles take them, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7171CO96wx1pfigs-rquestionἢ μόνος ἐγὼ καὶ Βαρναβᾶς, οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν μὴ ἐργάζεσθαι?1Or is it only Barnabas and I who do not have the right not to work?Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You seem to think that the only people you think need to work to earn money are Barnabas and me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7181CO97f3qffigs-rquestionτίς στρατεύεται ἰδίοις ὀψωνίοις ποτέ?1Who serves as a soldier at his own expense?Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We all know that no soldier has to buy his own supplies.” or “We all know that every soldier receives his supplies from the government.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7191CO97zh5mfigs-rquestionτίς φυτεύει ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἐσθίει?1Who plants a vineyard and does not eat its fruit?Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We all know that the one who plants a vineyard will always eat its fruit.” or “We all know that no one expects someone who plants a vineyard not to eat its fruits.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7201CO97r1ihfigs-rquestionἢ τίς ποιμαίνει ποίμνην, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ γάλακτος τῆς ποίμνης, οὐκ ἐσθίει?1Or who tends a flock and does not drink milk from it?Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “And we all know that those who tend flocks get their drink from the flocks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7211CO98jld4figs-rquestionμὴ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ταῦτα λαλῶ, ἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει?1Am I not saying these things according to human authority?Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You seem to think that I am saying these things based on merely human authority, but the law of Moses also says the same thing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7221CO98vy1nfigs-rquestionἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει?1Or does not the law also say this?Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You act as if you do not know that this is what is written in the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7231CO99h2d3figs-youοὐ φιμώσεις1Do not put a muzzle onMoses was speaking to the Israelites as if they were one person, so this command is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7241CO99sxk2figs-rquestionμὴ τῶν βοῶν μέλει τῷ Θεῷ?1Is it really the oxen that God cares about?Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not the oxen that God cares most about.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7251CO910x84tfigs-rquestionἢ δι’ ἡμᾶς πάντως λέγει?1Or is he speaking entirely for our sake?Paul asks a question to emphasize the statement he is making. Alternate translation: “Instead, God was certainly speaking about us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7261CO910f8f4figs-exclusiveδι’ ἡμᾶς-1for our sakeHere, both instances of **our** refer to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7271CO911g1whfigs-rquestionὑμῖν…μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν?1is it too much for us to reap material things from you?Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “among you, you should know without me telling you that it is not too much for us to receive material support from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7281CO912lld4figs-rquestionεἰ ἄλλοι τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν, οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς?1If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more?Paul asks a question so that the Corinthians will think of what he is saying without him having to say it. Alternate translation: “Others exercised this right over you, so you know without me telling you that we have this right even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7291CO912v333εἰ ἄλλοι τῆς…ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν1If others exercised this rightPaul and the Corinthians both know that others exercised the right. “Since others exercised this right”
7301CO912ybwyfigs-exclusiveοὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς1Here, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7311CO912nr6uἄλλοι1othersother workers of the gospel
7321CO912q7vjτῆς…ἐξουσίας1this rightthe **right** to have the believers at Corinth provide for the living expenses of those who told them the good news
7331CO912vt6tμή τινα ἐνκοπὴν δῶμεν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ1to cause any hindrance“we might now be a burden to the gospel” or “we would not stop the spread of the gospel”
7341CO913slf9figs-rquestionοὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐσθίουσιν; οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες, τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται?1Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the templePaul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that those who serve in the temple get their food from the temple, and those who serve at the altar eat from the things presented on the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7351CO914rj38figs-metonymyἐκ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ζῆν1get their living from the gospelThe words **the gospel** here are a metonym that refers to: (1) the people to whom they tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news” (2) the result of working to tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7361CO915fs7aοὐδενὶ τούτων1these rights“of any of these things that I deserve”
7371CO915sy42figs-activepassiveἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί1so that this might be done for meYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so you will do the same kind of things for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7381CO915fd69τὸ καύχημά μου…κενώσει1deprive me of my boasting“take away this opportunity I have to boast”
7391CO916ecw2ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται1this necessity was placed upon me“I must preach the gospel” or “God compels me to preach the gospel”
7401CO916l7asοὐαὶ…μοί ἐστιν1woe be to me if“may I suffer misfortune”
7411CO917x6s9ἑκὼν τοῦτο πράσσω1if I do this willingly“I preach willingly” or “I preach because I want to”
7421CO917t8pmfigs-ellipsisεἰ δὲ ἄκων1But if not willinglyThe words “I do this” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “But if I do this unwillingly” or “But if I do this even though I do not want to” or “But if I do this because I was forced to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7431CO917xa5pfigs-activepassiveοἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι1I have been entrusted with a stewardshipYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I must do this work that God trusted me to complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7441CO918lg51figs-rquestionτίς οὖν μού ἐστιν ὁ μισθός?1What then is my reward?Paul is preparing them for the new information he is going to give them. Alternate translation: “This is my reward.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7451CO918ia5xἵνα εὐαγγελιζόμενος ἀδάπανον, θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον1That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge“My reward for preaching is that I can preach without receiving payment”
7461CO918dln7θήσω τὸ εὐαγγέλιον1offer the gospel“I might preach the gospel”
7471CO918fn7iεἰς τὸ μὴ καταχρήσασθαι τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ1so not take full use of my right in the gospel“without asking people to support me as I travel and preach”
7481CO919s48lfigs-metaphorἐλεύθερος…ὢν ἐκ πάντων1I am free from allHere, **being free from all** is an idiom for having the ability to live without thinking of what one must do for others. Alternate translation: “although I am able to live without serving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7491CO919mms9τοὺς πλείονας κερδήσω1I might gain even more“I might persuade others to believe” or “I might help others trust in Christ”
7501CO920hh8tἐγενόμην…ὡς Ἰουδαῖος1I became like a Jew“I acted like a Jew” or “I practiced Jewish customs”
7511CO920s9tuὡς ὑπὸ νόμον1I became like one under the law“I became like one committed to following the law of Moses”
7521CO921qtu7ἀνόμοις1outside the law“who do not obey the laws of Moses”
7531CO924vn1d0Connecting Statement:Paul explains that he uses the liberty he has in Christ to discipline himself.
7541CO924urh5figs-rquestionοὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι οἱ ἐν σταδίῳ τρέχοντες, πάντες μὲν τρέχουσιν, εἷς δὲ λαμβάνει τὸ βραβεῖον?1Do you not know that in a race all the runners run the race, but that only one receives the prize?Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “Let me remind you that although all runners run the race, only one runner receives the prize.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7551CO924mq1dfigs-metaphorτρέχουσιν1runPaul compares living the Christian life and working for God to running a race and being an athlete. As in a race, the Christian life and work require strict discipline on the part of the runner, and, as in a race, the Christian has a specific goal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7561CO924mh8zfigs-metaphorοὕτως τρέχετε, ἵνα καταλάβητε1So run in such a way that you might obtain itPaul is speaking of the reward God will give his faithful people as if it were a prize given for an athletic contest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7571CO925bfe4figs-metaphorφθαρτὸν στέφανον…ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄφθαρτον1a wreath that is perishable … one that is imperishableThe word translated as **wreath** can either refer to the wreath of leaves that was given as prizes to athletes who won games and races. The same word can be translated as “crown.” Paul is using this double sense to compare the wreath which would dry up to a crown of eternal life that will never decay. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7581CO926k64nfigs-metaphorἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων1I do not run without purpose or box by beating the airHere, **run** and **boxing** are both metaphors for living the Christian life and serving God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7591CO926muucfigs-doublenegativesἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων1You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I know very well why I am running, and I know what I am doing when I box” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
7601CO926m7gffigs-doublenegativesὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως1You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “with purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
7611CO927blb7figs-metaphorαὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι1I myself may not be disqualifiedThe judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: “I would be disqualified by the judge” or “God would say that I failed to obey the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7621CO927s3sdfigs-activepassiveαὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι1This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. Alternate translation: “the judge disqualify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7631CO10introabcd0# 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”<br><br>In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lords Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Exodus<br><br>Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])<br><br>### Eating meat sacrificed to idol<br><br>Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, dont eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
7641CO101r66h0Connecting Statement:Paul reminds them of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers experiences with immorality and idolatry.
7651CO101g34ffigs-exclusiveοἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν πάντες ὑπὸ τὴν νεφέλην ἦσαν, καὶ πάντες διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον1our fathersPaul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word **our** refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7661CO101v4c6τῆς θαλάσσης1passed through the seaThis **sea** is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds.
7671CO101z5s9διὰ…διῆλθον1passed through“walked through” or “traveled through”
7681CO102f7cqπάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο1All were baptized into Moses“they all followed and were committed to Moses”
7691CO102y72iἐν τῇ νεφέλῃ1in the cloudThe **cloud** represented the presence of God and led the Israelites during the day.
7701CO104xut2πάντες τὸ αὐτὸ πνευματικὸν ἔπιον πόμα; ἔπινον γὰρ ἐκ πνευματικῆς ἀκολουθούσης πέτρας1drank the same spiritual drink … spiritual rock“drank the same water that God supernaturally brought out of the rock that followed them”
7711CO104whj4figs-metonymyἡ…πέτρα ἦν ὁ Χριστός1that rock was ChristThe **rock** was a literal, physical rock, so it would be best to translate this literally. If your language cannot say that a rock was a persons name, treat the word **rock** as a metonym for the power of Christ that worked through the rock. Alternate translation: “it was Christ who worked through that rock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7721CO105lh93figs-litotesοὐκ…ηὐδόκησεν1not well pleasedAlternate translation: “was displeased” or “was angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
7731CO105tnu4τοῖς πλείοσιν αὐτῶν1most of them“most of the Israelite fathers”
7741CO105w673figs-activepassiveκατεστρώθησαν1their corpses were scattered aboutYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God scattered their dead bodies around” or “God killed them and scattered their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7751CO105b96gἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ1in the wildernessThe **wilderness** is the desert land between Egypt and Israel through which the Israelites wandered for 40 years.
7761CO107ukp4figs-euphemismπαίζειν1to playPaul is quoting the Jewish scriptures. His readers would have understood from the phrase **to play** that the people were worshiping an idol by singing and dancing and engaging in sexual activities, not simply enjoying innocent fun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
7771CO108vw5gἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες1In one day, twenty-three thousand people died“God killed 23,000 people in one day”
7781CO109l5h4figs-activepassiveὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο1were destroyed by snakesYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7791CO1010i3q3figs-activepassiveἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ1were destroyed by the destroyerYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7801CO1011u1mpταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις1these things happened to them“God punished our ancestors”
7811CO1011wmp1figs-exclusiveἡμῶν1as examplesHere, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7821CO1011j3z1τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν1the end of the ages“the last days have come”
7831CO1012df2pμὴ πέσῃ1does not fall“he does not sin or reject God”
7841CO1013a8vjfigs-doublenegativesπειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος1No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanityYou can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
7851CO1013hc7qὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε1He will not let you be tempted beyond your abilityThis can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist”
7861CO1013a72tfigs-activepassiveοὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι1will not let you be temptedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not allow anyone to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7871CO1014dab40Connecting Statement:Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ.
7881CO1014n5tbfigs-metaphorφεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας1flee away from idolatryPaul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7891CO1016gi4sτὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον1The cup of blessingPaul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lords Supper.
7901CO1016tv8eὃ εὐλογοῦμεν1that we bless“for which we thank God”
7911CO1016y5uvfigs-rquestionτὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ?1is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ?Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: “When we bless the cup in the Lord's Supper, we share in the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7921CO1016ngf6figs-rquestionτὸν ἄρτον ὃν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?1The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ?Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know. Alternate translation: “When we break the bread of the Lord's Supper, we share in the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7931CO1017g954ἄρτος1loaf of breada single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten
7941CO1018q9ngfigs-rquestionοὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν?1Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar?Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7951CO1019ix5qfigs-rquestionτί οὖν φημι?1What am I saying then?Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7961CO1019j8djfigs-ellipsisὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?1Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything?The words “I am saying” are understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Am I saying that food sacrificed to idols or idols themselves are important?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7971CO1019l9t4figs-rquestionὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν?1Paul wants the Corinthians to answer the question in their minds so he does not have to tell them. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not saying that an idol is something real or that food sacrificed to idols is important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7981CO1021dy2gfigs-metonymyοὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων1You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demonsPaul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7991CO1021qwk7οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων1You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons“It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lords people and also with demons”
8001CO1022l8ikfigs-rquestionἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον?1Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy?Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8011CO1022h9fhπαραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον1provoketo anger or irritate the Lord
8021CO1022zv17figs-rquestionμὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν?1We are not stronger than him, are we?Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that we are not stronger than God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8031CO1023ped10Connecting Statement:Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others.
8041CO1023tu2mπάντα ἔξεστιν1Everything is lawfulThis could mean: (1) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, I can do anything.” (2) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” This should be translated as in [1 Corinthians 6:12](../06/12.md).
8051CO1023jm4kοὐ πάντα συμφέρει1not everything is beneficial“some things are not beneficial”
8061CO1023ex6zfigs-metaphorοὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ1not everything builds people upTo **build up** people represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “not everything strengthens people” or “some things do not strengthen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8071CO1027g31yὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν1you without asking questions of conscience“you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience”
8081CO1028q3ztfigs-youἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα1But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed youSome translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by anothers conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
8091CO1028qi77figs-youὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα1says to you … do not eat … informed youPaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
8101CO1029v1d9figs-youσυνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ1the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yoursSome translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by anothers conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
8111CO1029s1wkfigs-youοὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ1and not yoursPaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
8121CO1029k8xrἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?1For why … conscience?Possible meanings for this question, along with the question in the next verse, are (1) The word **For** refers back to [1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md). Alternate translation: “I am not to ask questions of conscience, so why … conscience?” (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “As some of you might be thinking, For why is my freedom judged by anothers conscience?’”
8131CO1029d4q1figs-rquestionἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως?1why should my freedom be judged by anothers conscience?The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “For you should know without me telling you that no one should be able to say I am doing wrong just because that person has ideas about right and wrong that are different from mine.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8141CO1030dv5ffigs-rquestionεἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ?1If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks?The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8151CO1030x2v5εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω1If I partakeIf Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the **I** represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats”
8161CO1030n89tχάριτι1with gratitude“and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it”
8171CO1032ag47ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν1Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks“Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry”
8181CO1033hd2zτὸ τῶν πολλῶν1the manyas many people as possible
8191CO11introabce0# 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lords Supper (verses 17-34).<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Proper conduct in a church service<br><br>### Disorderly women<br><br>Pauls instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.<br><br>### The Lords Supper<br><br>There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lords Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lords Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christs death if they participated in the Lords Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### The head<br><br>Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a persons actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8201CO111h5fg0Connecting Statement:After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers.
8211CO112qsk9πάντα μου μέμνησθε1you remember me in everything“you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them.
8221CO113k5umθέλω δὲ1Now I wantThis could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.”
8231CO113hbt7ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν1is the headhas authority over
8241CO113en95κεφαλὴ…γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ2a man is the head of a womanThis could mean: (1) men are to have authority over women. (2) the husband is to have authority over the wife.
8251CO114uuv2προφητεύων κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων1having something on his head“prophesying after placing a cloth or veil over his head”
8261CO114lit3καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ1dishonors his headThis could mean: (1) this brings disgrace on the man. (2) this brings disgrace on Christ, who is the head of the man.
8271CO115b7kuγυνὴ προσευχομένη ἢ προφητεύουσα ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ, καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς1woman who prays … dishonors her headThis could mean: (1) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on herself. (2) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on her husband.
8281CO115k5ylἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ1with her head uncoveredThat is, without the cloth that was worn on the top of the **head** and that covered the hair.
8291CO115e1pzτῇ ἐξυρημένῃ1as if her head were shavedas if she had removed all the hair on her head with a razor
8301CO116s4r5εἰ…αἰσχρὸν γυναικὶ2If it is disgraceful for a womanIt was a mark of disgrace or humiliation for a woman to have her hair shaved off or cut short.
8311CO117aa4rfigs-activepassiveοὐκ ὀφείλει κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν1should not have his head coveredYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) a man must not cover his head. (2) a man does not need to cover his head. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8321CO117t5jnδόξα ἀνδρός1glory of the manJust as man reflects Gods greatness, the woman reflects the mans character.
8331CO118s5nsfigs-activepassiveοὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.1For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from manGod made the **woman** by taking a bone from the **man** and making the woman from that bone. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make the man from the woman. Instead, he made the woman from the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8341CO118w8jmοὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός.1For neither … for manAll of [1 Corinthians 11:8-9](../11/08.md) could be put in parentheses so that the reader can see that “This is why” in [1 Corinthians 11:10](../11/10.md) refers back to the words “the woman is the glory of the man” in [1 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md).
8351CO1110wh4cἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς1have a symbol of authority on her headThis could symbolize that: (1) she has man as her head.” (2) she has the authority to pray or prophesy.
8361CO1111pir4πλὴν…ἐν Κυρίῳ1Nevertheless, in the Lord“While what I have just said is all true, the most important thing is this: in the Lord”
8371CO1111h9t4ἐν Κυρίῳ1in the LordThis could mean: (1) “among Christians, who belong to the Lord.” (2) “in the world as created by God.”
8381CO1111hqy4figs-doublenegativesοὔτε γυνὴ χωρὶς ἀνδρὸς, οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς γυναικὸς ἐν Κυρίῳ1the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the womanYou can state this positively. Alternate translation: “the woman depends on the man, and the man depends on the woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
8391CO1112i8quτὰ…πάντα ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ1all things come from God“God created everything”
8401CO1113eex3ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε1Judge for yourselves“Judge this issue according to the local customs and church practices you know”
8411CO1113hp13figs-rquestionπρέπον ἐστὶν γυναῖκα ἀκατακάλυπτον, τῷ Θεῷ προσεύχεσθαι?1Is it proper for a woman to pray to God with her head uncovered?Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. You can state this in active form. “To honor God, a woman should pray to God with a covering on her head.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8421CO1114v5b5figs-rquestionοὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν;1Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?This is the first part of a rhetorical question that continues into the next verse. Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. Alternate translation: “Even nature teaches you that if a man might have long hair, it is a disgrace for him;” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8431CO1114gyw9figs-personificationοὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν1Does not even nature itself teach you … for him?He is speaking of nature as if it were a person who teaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
8441CO1115s7ysfigs-activepassiveὅτι ἡ κόμη…δέδοται αὐτῇ1For her hair has been given to herYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For God created woman with long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8451CO1117id4f0Connecting Statement:As Paul talks about communion, the Lords supper, he reminds them to have right attitudes as well as unity. He reminds them that if they fail in those things when taking communion, they will become sick and die, as has already happened to some of them.
8461CO1117vt5aτοῦτο δὲ παραγγέλλων1in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For“But as I give you these instructions”
8471CO1117du1aοὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον1it is not for the better but for the worse“you do not help each other; instead, you harm each other”
8481CO1118iu3qἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ1in the church“as believers.” Paul is not talking about being inside a building.
8491CO1118l9vxσχίσματα ἐν ὑμῖν ὑπάρχειν1there are divisions among you“you divide yourselves into opposing groups”
8501CO1119s9syfigs-ironyδεῖ γὰρ καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι, ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν1For there must also be factions among youThis could mean: (1) the phrase **it is necessary** indicates that this situation is likely to happen. Alternate translation: “For there will probably be factions among you” (2) Paul was using irony to shame them for having factions. Alternate translation: “For you seem to think that there must be factions among you” or “For you seem to think that you must divide yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
8511CO1119kcr7αἱρέσεις1factionsopposing groups of people
8521CO1119j7dbδόκιμοι1who are approvedThis could refer to: (1) the ones whom God approves” (2) the ones whom the church approves.
8531CO1120x9h5συνερχομένων…ὑμῶν1come together“when you gather together”
8541CO1120dse7οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν1it is not the Lords Supper that you eat“you may believe you are eating the Lords Supper, but you do not treat it with respect”
8551CO1122f8htfigs-rquestionμὴ γὰρ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε εἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν?1Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “For if you just want to eat and to drink, you certainly have houses where you can do that!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8561CO1122zl1hεἰς τὸ ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν1to eat and to drink in“in which to gather for a meal”
8571CO1122am33figs-rquestionἢ τῆς ἐκκλησίας τοῦ Θεοῦ καταφρονεῖτε, καὶ καταισχύνετε τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας?1Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You are acting in such a way that despises the church of God and humiliates those who have nothing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8581CO1122d2cmκαταφρονεῖτε1despisehate or treat with dishonor and disrespect
8591CO1122nz88figs-rquestionτί εἴπω ὑμῖν? ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ?1What should I say to you? Should I praise you?Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I can say nothing good about this. I cannot praise you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8601CO1123av31ἐγὼ γὰρ παρέλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, ὃ καὶ παρέδωκα ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος1For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord“For it was from the Lord that I heard what I told you, and it was this: the Lord”
8611CO1123c197figs-activepassiveἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο1on the night when he was betrayedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “on the night that Judas Iscariot betrayed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8621CO1124e19dἔκλασεν1he broke it“he pulled pieces from it”
8631CO1124f6hnτοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα1This is my body“The bread I am holding is my body”
8641CO1125gr2kτὸ ποτήριον1the cupIt is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply “a cup” or “some cup” or “any cup.” This could refer to: (1) the cup of wine that one would expect him to use. (2) the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal.
8651CO1125z54eτοῦτο ποιεῖτε, ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε1Do this as often as you drink it“Drink from this cup, and as often as you drink from it”
8661CO1126m89ffigs-explicitἄχρι οὗ ἔλθῃ1until he comesWhere Jesus comes to can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “until Jesus comes back to the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8671CO1127as6yἐσθίῃ τὸν ἄρτον ἢ πίνῃ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ Κυρίου1eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord“the bread of the Lord or drinks the cup of the Lord”
8681CO1128nhx7figs-metaphorδοκιμαζέτω…ἄνθρωπος1examinePaul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how “test the quality” is translated in [1 Corinthians 3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8691CO1129gqd2μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα1without discerning the bodyThis could mean: (1) that person does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord. (2) that person does not consider that he is handling the Lords body.
8701CO1130kbi6ἀσθενεῖς καὶ ἄρρωστοι1weak and illThese words mean almost the same thing and can be combined, as in UST.
8711CO1130vx5tfigs-euphemismκοιμῶνται ἱκανοί1and many of you have fallen asleepHere, **fallen asleep** is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “and some of you have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]).
8721CO1130bh6jfigs-explicitἱκανοί1many of youIf this would sound like Paul is talking to those who have died, you may need to make explicit that he is not. Alternate translation: “many of the members of your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8731CO1131j6mlfigs-metaphorδιεκρίνομεν1examinePaul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8741CO1131egl8figs-activepassiveοὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα1we will not be judgedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God would not judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8751CO1132ruq5figs-activepassiveκρινόμενοι…ὑπὸ Κυρίου, παιδευόμεθα, ἵνα μὴ…κατακριθῶμεν1we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemnedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the Lord judges us, he disciplines us, so that he will not condemn us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8761CO1133maa7συνερχόμενοι εἰς τὸ φαγεῖν1come together to eatgather to eat a meal together before celebrating the Lords Supper
8771CO1133nky5ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε1wait for one another“allow the others to arrive before beginning the meal”
8781CO1134v2uhἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω1let him eat at home“let him eat before attending this gathering”
8791CO1134x1l8figs-metonymyμὴ εἰς κρίμα συνέρχησθε1not be for judgment“it will not be an occasion for God to discipline you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8801CO12introabcf0# 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Gifts of the Holy Spirit<br><br>This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The Church, the body of Christ<br><br>This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “No one can say, Jesus is Lord, except by the Holy Spirit.”<br><br>In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word “Lord” for the word “Yahweh.” This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirits influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
8811CO121da2e0Connecting Statement:Paul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers.
8821CO121i3k7figs-doublenegativesοὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν1I do not want you to be uninformedYou can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
8831CO122hbt8figs-metaphorἔθνη ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι1you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by themHere, **led astray** is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. Alternate translation: “you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8841CO122xnw1figs-activepassiveἔθνη ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι1You can state the phrases “were led astray” and “you were led by them” in active form. Alternate translation: “you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8851CO123zg4jοὐδεὶς ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν, λέγει1no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can sayThis could mean: (1) “no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say.” (2) “no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say.”
8861CO123jak6ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς1Jesus is accursed“God will punish Jesus” or “God will make Jesus suffer”
8871CO126eth3ὁ ἐνεργῶν τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν1who is working all things in everyone“who causes everyone to have them”
8881CO127x7mvfigs-activepassiveἑκάστῳ…δίδοται1to each one is givenYou can state this in active form. God is the one who does the giving ([1 Corinthians 12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “God gives to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8891CO128c9akfigs-activepassiveᾧ μὲν…διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος δίδοται λόγος1to one is given by the Spirit a wordYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit God gives to one person a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8901CO128us1kλόγος1a word“a message”
8911CO128pe8sfigs-activepassiveδίδοται1is givenYou can state this in active form. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 12:8](../12/08.md). Alternate translation: “God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8921CO129d7qgfigs-ellipsisἄλλῳ…χαρίσματα ἰαμάτων ἐν τῷ ἑνὶ Πνεύματι1to another gifts of healing by the one SpiritThe words **are given** are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit are given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
8931CO1210x572figs-ellipsisἄλλῳ προφητεία1to another prophecyThe phrase “is given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another prophecy is given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
8941CO1210v7xyfigs-ellipsisἑτέρῳ γένη γλωσσῶν1to another various kinds of tonguesThe phrase “are given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another various kinds of tongues are given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
8951CO1210skl8figs-metonymyγένη γλωσσῶν1various kinds of tonguesHere, **tongues** represents languages. Alternate translation: “the ability to speak different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8961CO1210j8qkfigs-ellipsisἄλλῳ…ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν4to another the interpretation of tonguesThe phrase “is given by the same Spirit” is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: “to another the interpretation of tongues is given by the same Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
8971CO1210c14yἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν1the interpretation of tonguesThis refers to the ability to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying. Alternate translation: “the ability to interpret what is said in other languages”
8981CO1211z383τὸ ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ Πνεῦμα1one and the same SpiritGod gives the gifts through the work of the one and only Holy **Spirit**. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 12:8](../12/08.md).
8991CO1212j3xl0Connecting Statement:Paul continues to talk of the variety of gifts God gives believers, God gives different gifts to different believers, but Paul wants them to know that all believers are made into one body, which is called the body of Christ. For this reason believers should have unity.
9001CO1213g8ukfigs-activepassiveἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες…ἐβαπτίσθημεν1For by one Spirit we were all baptizedThis could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us. Alternate translation: “one Spirit baptized us” (2) the Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body. Alternate translation: “God baptized is all with the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9011CO1213r9hmfigs-metonymyεἴτε…δοῦλοι, εἴτε ἐλεύθεροι3whether bound or freeHere, **bound** is a metonym for “enslaved.” Alternate translation: “whether slave-people or free-people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9021CO1213r5kwfigs-metaphorπάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν1all were made to drink of one SpiritHere the **Spirit** is spoken of as something that a person can drink. Alternate translation: “we were made to drink the Spirit as people might share a drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9031CO1213ju15figs-activepassiveπάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν1You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God gave all of us the same Spirit to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9041CO1217rsl6figs-rquestionεἰ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα ὀφθαλμός, ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή? εἰ ὅλον ἀκοή, ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις?1where would the sense of hearing be? … where would the sense of smell be?Paul asks these two questions to help the Corinthians to realize the importance of each part of the body. You can translate these as statements. Alternate translation: “If your whole body were an eye, you would not be able to hear anything! If your whole were an ear, you would not be able to smell anything!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9051CO1219y4vgfigs-rquestionεἰ δὲ ἦν τὰ πάντα ἓν μέλος, ποῦ τὸ σῶμα?1where would the body be?Paul asks this question to help the Corinthians to understand that the body must have many different kinds of members. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But if all the parts of the body were the same, there would be no body!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9061CO1219zw6kτὰ…ἓν μέλος1the same memberThe word **member** is a general word for the parts of the body, like the head, arm, or knee. Alternate translation: “the same part of the body”
9071CO1223id5zfigs-euphemismτὰ ἀσχήμονα ἡμῶν1our unpresentable membersHere, **unpresentable members** probably refers to the private parts of the body, which people keep covered. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
9081CO1225z4kkμὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἀλλὰ1there may be no division within the body, but“the body may be unified, and”
9091CO1226da97figs-activepassiveδοξάζεται μέλος1one member is honoredYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone gives honor to one member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9101CO1227z2ctὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε1Now you areHere the word **Now** is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
9111CO1228ll3sπρῶτον ἀποστόλους1first apostlesThis could mean: (1) the first gift Paul will mention is apostles. (2) the most important gift Paul will mention is apostles.
9121CO1228unh1ἀντιλήμψεις1those who provide helps“those who provide help to other believers”
9131CO1228l6p1κυβερνήσεις1those who do the work of administration“those who govern the church”
9141CO1228w726γένη γλωσσῶν1those who have various kinds of tonguespeople who can speak in one or more foreign languages without having studied that language
9151CO1229aq64figs-rquestionμὴ πάντες ἀπόστολοι? μὴ πάντες προφῆται? μὴ πάντες διδάσκαλοι? μὴ πάντες δυνάμεις?1Are all of them apostles? Are all prophets? Are all teachers? Do all do powerful deeds?Paul uses these questions to remind his readers of what they already know. Alternate translation: “Only some of them are apostles. Only some of them are prophets. Only some of them are teachers. Only some of them do powerful deeds.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9161CO1230p919figs-rquestionμὴ πάντες χαρίσματα ἔχουσιν ἰαμάτων? μὴ πάντες γλώσσαις λαλοῦσιν? μὴ πάντες διερμηνεύουσιν?1Do all of them have gifts of healing?Paul continues to use questions to remind his readers of what they already know. Alternate translation: “Only some have gifts of healing. Only some speak with tongues. Only some interpret tongues.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9171CO1230ab9eδιερμηνεύουσιν1interpretTo **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
9181CO1231vb1mζηλοῦτε…τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα1earnestly desire the greater gifts.This could mean: (1) they must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church. (2) they are eagerly looking for gifts that they think are greater because they think those are more exciting to have.
9191CO13introabcg0# 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Love<br><br>Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9201CO131n8lm0Connecting Statement:Having just talked about the gifts that God gave to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important.
9211CO131cm2nfigs-hyperboleταῖς γλώσσαις…τῶν ἀγγέλων1the tongues of … angelsThis could mean: (1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use. (2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9221CO131k2gkfigs-metaphorγέγονα χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον1I have become a noisy gong or a clanging cymbalA person speaking without love is compared to musical instruments that make loud, annoying sounds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9231CO131krt1translate-unknownχαλκὸς1gongA **gong** is a large, thin, round metal plate that is hit with a padded stick to make a loud sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9241CO131qbx6translate-unknownκύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον1a clanging cymbalA **cymbal** is a thin, round metal plate that is hit with something—or two cymbals are struck together—to make a loud sound. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9251CO133ar2qfigs-explicitπαραδῶ τὸ σῶμά μου1I give my bodyThe phrase **had over my body** refers to giving up one's own body to be abused or killed. Alternate translation: “I allow people to persecute or kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9261CO134m671figs-personificationἡ ἀγάπη μακροθυμεῖ, χρηστεύεται; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ ζηλοῖ; ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ περπερεύεται, οὐ φυσιοῦται1Love is patient and kind … It is not arrogantHere Paul speaks about **Love** as if it were a person who could do these actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9271CO135cp6xfigs-personification0Connecting Statement:Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9281CO135xt3vfigs-activepassiveοὐ παροξύνεται1It is not easily angeredYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make it angry quickly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9291CO136wl5yfigs-personification0Connecting Statement:Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9301CO136tpz6figs-doublenegativesοὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ1It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truthYou can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “It rejoices only in righteousness and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
9311CO137vf6xfigs-personification0Connecting Statement:Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9321CO1312bn3hβλέπομεν γὰρ ἄρτι δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι1For now we see indirectly in a mirrorIn Pauls day, a **mirror** was made of polished metal rather than glass and provided a dim, vague reflection.
9331CO1312w2euβλέπομεν…ἄρτι1now we seeThis could mean: (1) they now see Christ. (2) they now see God.
9341CO1312xx1gfigs-ellipsisτότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον1but then face to faceThe words “we will see” are implied here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
9351CO1312tjq9figs-synecdocheτότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον1Here, **face to face** means that we will be physically present with Christ. Alternate translation: “but then we will see Christ face to face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9361CO1312qp7gfigs-ellipsisἐπιγνώσομαι1I will know fullyThe word “Christ” is understood. Alternate translation: “I will know Christ fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
9371CO1312i28wfigs-activepassiveκαθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην1just as I have also been fully knownYou can state this as active. Alternate translation: “just as Christ has known me fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9381CO1313nt1yfigs-abstractnounsπίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη1faith, hope, and loveThe abstract nouns **faith**, **hope**, and **love** can be expressed in phrases with verbs. Alternate translation: “we must trust the Lord, be confident that he will do what he has promised, and love him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9391CO14introabch0# 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.<br><br>Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.<br><br>### Prophecy<br><br>Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
9401CO141vl570Connecting Statement:Paul wants them to know that though teaching is more important because it instructs people, it must be done with love.
9411CO141x938figs-personificationδιώκετε τὴν ἀγάπην1Pursue lovePaul speaks of **love** as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “Follow after love” or “Work hard to love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9421CO141ki3lμᾶλλον…ἵνα προφητεύητε1especially that you may prophesy“work especially hard to be able to prophesy”
9431CO143r1nxfigs-metaphorοἰκοδομὴν1to build them upHere, **building up** represents helping people become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “for strengthening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9441CO144b2mgfigs-metaphorἑαυτὸν οἰκοδομεῖ1builds upHere, **builds up** represents helping himself become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “strengthens himself in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9451CO145z5myfigs-synecdocheμείζων δὲ ὁ προφητεύων1Now the one who prophesies is greaterPaul is emphasizing that the gift of prophecy is greater than the gift of speaking in tongues. Alternate translation: “The one who prophesies has a greater gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9461CO145g9k1διερμηνεύῃ1he would interpretThis means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
9471CO146l71kfigs-rquestionἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς γλώσσαις λαλῶν, τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω, ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ?1how will I benefit you?This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not benefit you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” or “if I come to you speaking in tongues, I will not have done anything that helps you, unless I speak to you either in revelation or in knowledge or in prophecy or teaching.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9481CO147t3rbδιαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ1they do not make different soundsHere, **sounds** refers to different pitches that make up the melody, not to the difference between a flute sound and a harp sound.
9491CO147hq2ufigs-rquestionἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ, πῶς γνωσθήσεται τὸ αὐλούμενον ἢ τὸ κιθαριζόμενον?1how will it be known what is being played on the flutePaul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if they would not give different sounds, no one will know what tune the flute or harp is playing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9501CO148z6jgfigs-rquestionἐὰν ἄδηλον σάλπιγξ φωνὴν δῷ, τίς παρασκευάσεται εἰς πόλεμον?1who will prepare for battle?Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: “if a trumpet gives an uncertain sound, no one would know when it is time to prepare for battle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9511CO1410im7afigs-doublenegativesοὐδὲν ἄφωνον1none is without meaningYou can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “they all have meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
9521CO1412j1h7figs-metaphorπρὸς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν τῆς ἐκκλησίας, ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε1try to excel in the gifts that build up the churchPaul speaks of the **church** as if it were a house that one could build and of the work of building the church as if it were something one could harvest. Alternate translation: “to succeed greatly in making Gods people more able to serve God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9531CO1413j87gδιερμηνεύῃ1interpretTo **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
9541CO1414kjh6figs-metaphorὁ…νοῦς μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν1my mind is unfruitfulThe mind not understanding what is being prayed and, therefore, receiving no benefit from the prayer is spoken of as if the **mind is unfruitful**. Alternate translation: “I do not understand it in my mind” or “my mind does not benefit from the prayer, because I do not understand the words I am saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9551CO1415vm6pfigs-rquestionτί οὖν ἐστιν?1What should I do?Paul is introducing his conclusion. Alternate translation: “This is what I will do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9561CO1415r11fπροσεύξομαι τῷ Πνεύματι, προσεύξομαι δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ. ψαλῶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ψαλῶ δὲ καὶ τῷ νοΐ1pray with my spirit … pray with my mind … sing with my spirit … sing with my mindPrayers and songs must be in a language that the people present can understand.
9571CO1415fi2fτῷ νοΐ1with my mind“with words that I understand”
9581CO1416niu5figs-youεὐλογῇς…τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ…λέγεις1you praise God … you are giving thanks … you are sayingThough **you** and **your** are singular here, Paul is addressing everyone who prays only in the spirit, but not with the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
9591CO1416r4w5figs-rquestionἐὰν εὐλογῇς πνεύματι, ὁ ἀναπληρῶν τὸν τόπον τοῦ ἰδιώτου, πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν, ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τί λέγεις, οὐκ οἶδεν?1how will the outsider say “Amen” … saying?This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “if you bless with the spirit, the outsider will never be able to say Amen at your thanksgiving, since he does not know what you are saying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9601CO1416j3e3τοῦ ἰδιώτου1the ungiftedThis could refer to: (1) another person. (2) people who are new to their group.
9611CO1416ev63figs-synecdocheἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν1say “Amen”“will … be able to agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9621CO1417a7wrfigs-youσὺ μὲν…εὐχαριστεῖς1you certainly givePaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
9631CO1417w25kfigs-metaphorὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται1the other person is not built upBuilding people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the other person is not strengthened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9641CO1417m7cjfigs-activepassiveἀλλ’ ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται1You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what you say does not strengthen any outsider who might hear you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9651CO1419cbw8figs-hyperboleἢ μυρίους λόγους1than ten thousand words in a tonguePaul was not counting **words**, but used exaggeration to emphasize that a few understandable words are far more valuable than even a great number of words in a language that people cannot understand. Alternate translation: “10,000 words” or “a great many words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9661CO1420luu40General Information:Paul tells them that speaking in different languages was told ahead of time by the prophet Isaiah many years before this speaking in other languages happened at the start of Christs church.
9671CO1420mh5tfigs-metaphorμὴ παιδία γίνεσθε ταῖς φρεσίν1do not be children in your thinkingHere, **children** is a metaphor for being spiritually immature. Alternate translation: “do not think like children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9681CO1421jx6lfigs-activepassiveἐν τῷ νόμῳ γέγραπται1In the law it is written,You can state this in active form: Alternate translation: “The prophet wrote these words in the law:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9691CO1421l9xzfigs-parallelismἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις καὶ ἐν χείλεσιν ἑτέρων1By men of strange tongues and by the lips of strangersThese two phrases mean basically the same thing and are used together for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9701CO1422bp4j0Connecting Statement:Paul gives specific instructions on an orderly way to use gifts in the church.
9711CO1422qj5ffigs-doublenegativesοὐ τοῖς πιστεύουσιν, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἀπίστοις1not for unbelievers, but for believersThis can be expressed positively and combined with the other positive statement. Alternate translation: “only for believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
9721CO1423hj3dfigs-rquestionοὐκ ἐροῦσιν ὅτι μαίνεσθε?1would they not say that you are insane?This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “they would say that you are insane.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9731CO1424xxy5figs-parallelismἐλέγχεται ὑπὸ πάντων, ἀνακρίνεται ὑπὸ πάντων1he would be convicted by all and examined by allPaul says basically the same thing twice for emphasis. Alternate translation: “he would realize that he is guilty of sin because he hears what you are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9741CO1425ma47figs-metonymyτὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται1The secrets of his heart would be revealedHere, **heart** is a metonym for a persons thoughts. Alternate translation: “his own private inner thoughts will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9751CO1425l62ffigs-activepassiveτὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς καρδίας αὐτοῦ φανερὰ γίνεται1You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God would reveal to him the secrets of his heart” or “He would recognize his own private inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9761CO1425w31wfigs-idiomπεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, προσκυνήσει τῷ Θεῷ1he would fall on his face and worship GodHere, **having fallen on his face** is an idiom, meaning he has bowed down. Alternate translation: “he would bow down and worship God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9771CO1426bv9kfigs-rquestionτί οὖν ἐστιν, ἀδελφοί?1What is tp be then, brothers?Paul uses a question to introduce the next part of his message. Alternate translation: “Because everything I have just told you is true, this is what you need to do, my fellow believers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9781CO1426xzz2ἑρμηνίαν1interpretationHere, an **interpretation** means a telling of what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
9791CO1427wc1zκαὶ ἀνὰ μέρος1and each one in turn“and they should speak one after another” or “and they should speak one at a time”
9801CO1427ari2διερμηνευέτω1must interpretTo **interpret** means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
9811CO1429a9izπροφῆται…δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν1Let two or three prophets speakThis could mean: (1) only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time.
9821CO1430sl1qfigs-activepassiveἐὰν…ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ1if a revelation is given to anotherYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God gives insight to another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9831CO1431xr69καθ’ ἕνα…προφητεύειν1prophesy one by oneOnly one person should prophesy at a time.
9841CO1431nrq1figs-activepassiveπάντες…παρακαλῶνται3all may be encouragedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you may encourage all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9851CO1433my65οὐ…ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς1God is not a God of confusionGod does not create confusing situations by making people all speak at the same time.
9861CO1434gjv2αἱ γυναῖκες…σιγάτωσαν1let be silentThis could mean: (1) they should stop speaking. (2) they should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. (3) they should be absolutely silent during the church service.
9871CO1436h8lpfigs-rquestionἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν?1Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?Paul uses these questions to emphasize that the Corinthians are not the only ones who understand what God wants Christians to do. Alternate translation: “The word of God did not come from you in Corinth; you are not the only people who understand Gods will.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9881CO1436mj6bfigs-metonymyὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ1the word of GodHere, the **word of God** is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: “Gods message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9891CO1437ab6uἐπιγινωσκέτω1he should acknowledgeA true prophet or truly spiritual person will accept Pauls writings as coming from the Lord.
9901CO1439jvr7τὸ λαλεῖν μὴ κωλύετε γλώσσαις1do not forbid anyone from speaking in tonguesPaul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable.
9911CO1440d7iafigs-activepassiveπάντα δὲ εὐσχημόνως καὶ κατὰ τάξιν γινέσθω1But let all things be done properly and in orderPaul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But do all things properly and in order” or “But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9921CO15introabci0# 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Resurrection<br><br>This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Resurrection<br><br>Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
9931CO151gc6n0Connecting Statement:Paul reminds them that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson, which ends with what will yet happen.
9941CO151la9vγνωρίζω…ὑμῖν1make known to you“I am helping you remember”
9951CO151xv53figs-metaphorἐν ᾧ καὶ ἑστήκατε1on which you standPaul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9961CO152xh29figs-activepassiveσῴζεσθε1you are being savedYou can state this in active form. “God is saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9971CO152le2kτίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν1the word I preached to you“to the message I preached to you”
9981CO153sp4pἐν πρώτοις1as of first importanceThis could mean: (1) this is the most important of many things. (2) this is the first in time (3) this was done previously.
9991CO153azw6ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν1for our sins“to pay for our sins” or “so that God could forgive our sins”
10001CO153inj2κατὰ τὰς Γραφάς1according to the scripturesHere, **the Scriptures** refers to the writings of the Old Testament.
10011CO154wa7mfigs-activepassiveἐτάφη1he was buriedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10021CO154n7c7figs-activepassiveἐγήγερται1he was raisedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10031CO154d6ewἐγήγερται1was raised“was caused to live again”
10041CO155rhd30Connecting Statement:If you need for verse 5 to be a complete sentence, end [1 Corinthians 15:4](../15/04.md) with a comma so that verse 5 completes the sentence begun in [1 Corinthians 15:3](../15/03.md).
10051CO155q3nbὤφθη Κηφᾷ1he appeared“showed himself to Cephas”
10061CO156q8blfigs-euphemismτινὲς…ἐκοιμήθησαν1some have fallen asleepHere, **have fallen asleep** is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “some have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
10071CO158n9c6ἔσχατον…πάντων1Last of all“finally, after he had appeared to the others”
10081CO158vg7tfigs-idiomτῷ ἐκτρώματι1a child born at the wrong timeThis is an idiom by which Paul may mean that he became a Christian much later than the other apostles. Or perhaps he means that, unlike the other apostles, he did not witness Jesus three-year-long ministry. Alternate translation: “someone who missed the experiences of the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10091CO1510xiq6χάριτι…Θεοῦ, εἰμι ὅ εἰμι1by the grace of God I am what I amGods grace or kindness has made Paul as he is now.
10101CO1510n45hfigs-litotesἡ χάρις αὐτοῦ ἡ εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ κενὴ ἐγενήθη1his grace in me was not in vainPaul is emphasizing through litotes that God worked through Paul. Alternate translation: “because he was kind to me, I was able to do much good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
10111CO1510xh95figs-metaphorἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί1the grace of God that is with mePaul speaks of the work he was able to do because **God** was kind to him as if that **grace** were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) this is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool. (2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Pauls work have good results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10121CO1512ub2pfigs-rquestionπῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν?1how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead?Paul is using this question to begin a new topic. Alternate translation: “you should not be saying that there is no resurrection of the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10131CO1512jbi8ἐγήγερται1raisedhe was made alive again
10141CO1513cn2mfigs-hypoεἰ…ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν, οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται1if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raisedPaul is using a hypothetical case to argue that there is a **resurrection of the dead**. He knows that **Christ has been raised** and so infers that there is a resurrection. To say that there is no resurrection is to say that Christ has not been raised, but this is false because Paul has seen the resurrected Christ ([1 Corinthians 15:8](../15/08.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
10151CO1513mi12figs-activepassiveοὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται1not even Christ has been raisedYou can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has not even raised Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10161CO1515gi990Connecting Statement:Paul wants them assured that Christ rose from the dead.
10171CO1515ctn5εὑρισκόμεθα…ψευδομάρτυρες τοῦ Θεοῦ1we are found to be false witnesses about GodPaul is arguing that if Christ did not rise from the dead, then they are bearing false witness or lying about Christs coming alive again.
10181CO1515aq5sfigs-activepassiveεὑρισκόμεθα1we are found to beYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will realize that we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10191CO1517v6vzματαία ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, ἔτι ἐστὲ ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν1your faith is in vain and you are still in your sinsTheir faith is based on Christ having risen from the dead, so if that did not happen, their faith will do them no good.
10201CO1519d9nqπάντων ἀνθρώπων1of all people“of everyone, including believers and non-believers”
10211CO1519ts7uἐλεεινότεροι πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἐσμέν1of all people we are most to be pitied“people should feel sorry for us more than they do for anyone else”
10221CO1520cxp9νυνὶ…Χριστὸς1now Christ“as it is, Christ” or “this is the truth: Christ”
10231CO1520zw31figs-metaphorἀπαρχὴ1the firstfruitsHere, **firstfruit** is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “who is like the first part of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10241CO1520n6clfigs-idiomΧριστὸς ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν1Christ has been raised from the dead, the firstfruit of those who have fallen asleepHere, **has been raised** is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “Christ has been caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10251CO1520a385figs-activepassiveΧριστὸς ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν1You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has raised Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10261CO1521uca8figs-abstractnounsδι’ ἀνθρώπου θάνατος1death came by a manThe abstract noun **death** can be expressed with the verb “die.” Alternate translation. “people die because of what one man did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10271CO1521gf8pfigs-abstractnounsκαὶ δι’ ἀνθρώπου ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν1by a man also came the resurrection of the deadThe abstract noun **resurrection** can be expressed with the verb “raise.” Alternate translation: “people are raised from the dead because of another man” or “people will become alive again because of what one man did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10281CO1523p4g9figs-metaphorἀπαρχὴ1the firstfruitsHere, **firstfruit** is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “who is like the first part of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10291CO1524u2980General Information:Here the words **he** and **his** refer to Christ.
10301CO1524uwh3καταργήσῃ πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν1he will abolish all rule and all authority and power“he will stop those people who rule, who have authority, and who have power from doing what they are doing”
10311CO1525t8mkfigs-idiomἄχρι οὗ θῇ πάντας τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ1until he has put all his enemies under his feetKings who won wars would put their **feet** on the necks of those whom they had defeated. Alternate translation: “until God has completely destroyed all of Christs enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10321CO1526x49hfigs-personificationἔσχατος ἐχθρὸς καταργεῖται ὁ θάνατος1The last enemy to be destroyed is deathPaul speaks of **death** here as if it were a person whom God will kill. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
10331CO1526n32ffigs-activepassiveἔσχατος ἐχθρὸς καταργεῖται ὁ θάνατος1You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The final enemy that God will destroy is death itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10341CO1527df59figs-idiomπάντα…ὑπέταξεν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ1he has put everything under his feetKings who won wars would put their **feet** on the necks of those whom they had defeated. See how “put … under his feet” is translated in [1 Corinthians 15:25](../15/25.md). Alternate translation: “God has completely destroyed all of Christs enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10351CO1528xm8ufigs-activepassiveὑποταγῇ αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα1all things are subjected to himThis can stated as active. Alternate translation: “God has made all things subject to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10361CO1528a1cdfigs-activepassiveαὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς, ὑποταγήσεται1the Son himself will be subjectedThis can stated as active. Alternate translation: “the Son himself will become subject” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10371CO1528ksj4αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς1the Son himselfIn the previous verses he was referred to as “Christ.” Alternate translation: “Christ, that is, the Son himself”
10381CO1528im2jguidelines-sonofgodprinciplesὁ Υἱὸς1the SonThis is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
10391CO1529a4d4figs-rquestionἐπεὶ τί ποιήσουσιν, οἱ βαπτιζόμενοι ὑπὲρ τῶν νεκρῶν?1Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead?Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Otherwise it would be useless for Christians to receive baptism for the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10401CO1529lw86figs-hypoεἰ ὅλως νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται, τί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν?1If the dead are not raised at all, why are they baptized for them?Paul uses a hypothetical situation to argue that the dead are raised. To say that **the dead are not raised** is to say that people should not be baptized for the dead. But some people, probably some members of the church in Corinth, are baptized for the dead, so he infers those people are baptized for the dead because they believe that the dead are raised. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
10411CO1529jdc9figs-activepassiveνεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται1the dead are not raisedYou can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God does not raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10421CO1529t3ycοὐκ ἐγείρονται1are not raised“are not caused to live again”
10431CO1529s7kxfigs-rquestionτί καὶ βαπτίζονται ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν1why then are they baptized for them?Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there would be no reason for them to have people baptize them on behalf of dead people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10441CO1530h4rafigs-rquestionτί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν?1Why then, are we in danger every hour?Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “We gain nothing by being in danger every hour.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10451CO1530t593figs-explicitτί καὶ ἡμεῖς κινδυνεύομεν πᾶσαν ὥραν?1The reason he and others were in danger is that some people were angry that they taught that Jesus will raise people from death. Alternate translation: “If people will not rise from the dead, we gain nothing by being in danger every hour for teaching that people will rise.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10461CO1531i7d7figs-hyperboleκαθ’ ἡμέραν ἀποθνῄσκω1I die every day!This exaggeration means he was in danger of dying. He knew that some people wanted to kill him because they did not like what he was teaching. Alternate translation: “Every day I am in danger of dying” or “Every day I risk my life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10471CO1531d51tκαθ’ ἡμέραν ἀποθνῄσκω, νὴ τὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν1I swear by my boasting in youPaul uses this statement as evidence that he faces death every day. Alternate translation: “You can know I die every day, because you know about my boasting in you”
10481CO1531znl3figs-explicitτὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν, ἀδελφοί, ἣν ἔχω ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν1my boasting in you, brothers, which I have in Christ Jesus our LordPaul boasted in them because of what Christ Jesus had done for him. Alternate translation: “my boasting in you, which I do because of my relationship with Christ Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10491CO1531p3ymτὴν ὑμετέραν καύχησιν1my boasting in you“telling other people how good you are”
10501CO1532q6mbfigs-rquestionεἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ, τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος?1What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raisedPaul wants the Corinthians to understand without him having to tell them. This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “If Christ was not raised, I gained nothing, according to the opinion of most people, by fighting with beasts at Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10511CO1532lm3vfigs-metaphorἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ1I fought with beasts at EphesusThis could mean: (1) Paul was speaking figuratively about his arguments with learned pagans or other conflicts with people who wanted to kill him. (2) Paul was actually put into the arena to fight against dangerous animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10521CO1532c36aφάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν, αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνῄσκομεν1Let us eat and drink, for tomorrow we diePaul concludes that if there is no further life after death, it is better for us to enjoy this life as we can, for tomorrow our life will end without any further hope.
10531CO1533q7ucφθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί1Bad company corrupts good moralsIf you live with bad people, you will act like them. Paul is quoting a common saying.
10541CO1534gr3vἐκνήψατε1Sober up“You must think seriously about this”
10551CO1535w4hk0Connecting Statement:Paul gives some specifics about how the resurrection of the believers bodies will take place. He gives a picture of natural and spiritual bodies and compares the first man Adam with the last Adam, Christ.
10561CO1535hw4afigs-rquestionἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται?1But someone will say, “How are the dead raised, and with what kind of body will they come?”This could mean: (1) the person is asking sincerely. (2) the person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: “But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10571CO1535ty4tἐρεῖ τις1someone will say“perhaps someone will ask”
10581CO1535e5lvποίῳ…σώματι ἔρχονται1with what kind of body will they comeThat is, will it be a physical body or a spiritual body? What shape will the body have? What will the body be made of? Translate using the most general question that someone who wants to know the answers to these questions would ask.
10591CO1536ha84figs-youἄφρων! σὺ ὃ σπείρεις1You are so foolish! What you sowPaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of **you** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
10601CO1536jnf9ἄφρων! σὺ1You are so foolish! What you sow“You do not know about this at all!”
10611CO1536q2zdfigs-metaphorὃ σπείρεις, οὐ ζῳοποιεῖται, ἐὰν μὴ ἀποθάνῃ1What you sow will not start to grow unless it diesA seed will not grow unless it is first buried underground. In the same way, a person has to die before God can resurrect him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10621CO1537pw6vfigs-metaphorὃ σπείρεις, οὐ τὸ σῶμα τὸ γενησόμενον1What you sow is not the body that will bePaul uses the metaphor of the seed again to say that God will resurrect the dead body of the believer, but that body will not appear as it was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10631CO1537h6zifigs-youὃ σπείρεις1What you sowPaul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
10641CO1538dmx1ὁ…Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν1God will give it a body as he chooses“God will decide what kind of body it will have”
10651CO1539qi8yσὰρξ1fleshIn the context of animals, **flesh** may be translated as “body,” “skin,” or “meat.”
10661CO1540d9k2σώματα ἐπουράνια1heavenly bodiesThis could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, stars, and other visible lights in the sky. (2) heavenly beings, such as angels and other supernatural beings.
10671CO1540k9pgσώματα ἐπίγεια1earthly bodiesThis refers to humans.
10681CO1540qg3pἑτέρα μὲν ἡ τῶν ἐπουρανίων δόξα, ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ τῶν ἐπιγείων1the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another“the glory that heavenly bodies have is different from the glory of human bodies”
10691CO1540j1kbδόξα1gloryHere, **glory** refers to the relative brightness to the human eye of objects in the sky.
10701CO1542s12tfigs-metaphorσπείρεται…ἐγείρεται1What is sown … what is raisedThe writer speaks of a persons body being buried as if it were a seed that is scattered on the ground. And he speaks of a persons body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10711CO1542b6obfigs-activepassiveσπείρεται…ἐγείρεται1You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “What goes into the ground … what comes out of the ground” or “What people bury … what God raises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10721CO1542ay76ἐγείρεται1is raised“is caused to live again”
10731CO1542rw3kἐν φθορᾷ, ἐγείρεται ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ1in decay … in immortality“that can rot, cannot rot when it is raised”
10741CO1543h4u5figs-metaphorσπείρεται…ἐγείρεται1It is sown … it is raisedThe writer speaks of a persons body being buried as if it were a seed that is scattered on the ground. And he speaks of a persons body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10751CO1543zo03figs-activepassiveσπείρεται…ἐγείρεται1You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “It goes into the ground … it comes out of the ground” or “People bury it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10761CO1544u856figs-metaphorσπείρεται…ἐγείρεται1It is sown … it is raisedThe writer speaks of a persons body being buried as if it were a seed that is planted in the ground. And he speaks of a persons body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10771CO1544b4dmfigs-activepassiveσπείρεται…ἐγείρεται1You can state the passive verbs in active form. Alternate translation: “It goes into the ground … it comes out of the ground” or “People bury it … God raises it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10781CO1546fc51ἀλλ’ οὐ πρῶτον τὸ πνευματικὸν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ψυχικόν, ἔπειτα τὸ πνευματικόν1But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual“The natural being came first. The spiritual being is from God and came later.”
10791CO1546nd64ψυχικόν1naturalcreated by earthly processes, not yet connected to God
10801CO1547m2pjfigs-explicitὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος ἐκ γῆς, χοϊκός1The first man is of the earth, made of dustGod made the **first man**, Adam, from the **dust** of the **earth**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10811CO1548r9befigs-explicitὁ ἐπουράνιος1ὁ ἐπουράνιοςThis refers to Jesus Christ, who is from heaven. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10821CO1548s9pnοἱ ἐπουράνιοι1those who are of heaven“those who belong to God”
10831CO1549mq8zεἰκόνα τοῦ χοϊκοῦ, φορέσωμεν καὶ τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ ἐπουρανίου1have borne the image … will also bear the image“have been just like Adam, we will also be just like Jesus”
10841CO1550jub20Connecting Statement:Paul wants them to realize that some believers will not die physically but will still get a resurrected body through Christs victory.
10851CO1550mwy3figs-parallelismσὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ1flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishableThis could mean: (1) the two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God” (2) the second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: “weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither do those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
10861CO1550nz7sfigs-metonymyσὰρξ καὶ αἷμα1flesh and bloodHere, **flesh and blood** refers to people, who inhabit a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10871CO1550e4gdfigs-metaphorκληρονομῆσαι1inheritReceiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10881CO1550b9hcἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν1the perishable … the imperishable“what can rot … what cannot rot.” See how these words are translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
10891CO1551k5dwfigs-activepassiveπάντες…ἀλλαγησόμεθα2we will all be changedYou can state this as active. Alternate translation: “God will change us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10901CO1552p8f8figs-activepassiveἀλλαγησόμεθα1We will be changedYou can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will change us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10911CO1552r4ixἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ1in the twinkling of an eyeIt will happen as fast as it takes for a person to blink his or her eye.
10921CO1552h668figs-metaphorἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι1at the last trumpetHere, the **last trumpet** refers to the sounding of trumpets before the return of Christ and the final judgment of those who have not believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “when the last trumpet sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10931CO1552l66qfigs-activepassiveοἱ νεκροὶ ἐγερθήσονται1the dead will be raisedYou can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will raise the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10941CO1552ymk9ἐγερθήσονται1raised“will be caused to live again”
10951CO1552bmx2ἄφθαρτοι1imperishable“in a form that cannot rot.” See how a similar phrase is translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
10961CO1553nua2τὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο…ἀφθαρσίαν1this perishable body … is imperishable“this body that can rot … the inability to rot.” See how similar phrases are translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
10971CO1553iyd2figs-metaphorἐνδύσασθαι ἀφθαρσίαν1must put onPaul is speaking of God making our bodies so they will never die again as if God were putting new clothes on us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10981CO1554qq5mfigs-personificationτὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν, καὶ τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν1when this perishable body has put on what is imperishableHere the body is spoken of as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
10991CO1554od10figs-metaphorτὸ φθαρτὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀφθαρσίαν1Here becoming **imperishable** is spoken of as if being imperishable was clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: “when this perishable body has become imperishable” or “when this body that can rot can no longer rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11001CO1554j9zsfigs-metaphorτὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο ἐνδύσηται ἀθανασίαν1this mortal body has put on immortalityHere becoming immortal is spoken of as if being immortal was clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: “when this mortal body has become immortal” or “when this body that can die can no longer die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11011CO1555c9zwfigs-apostropheθάνατε1Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting?Paul speaks as if death were a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
11021CO1555pdxofigs-rquestionποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον?1Paul uses this question to mock the power of death, which Christ has defeated. Alternate translation: “Death has no victory. Death has no sting.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
11031CO1555gg3dfigs-youσου…σου1your … yourBoth possessive pronouns **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
11041CO1556iyd3τὸ…κέντρον τοῦ θανάτου ἡ ἁμαρτία1the sting of death is sinIt is through **sin** that we are destined to face **death**, that is, to die.
11051CO1556pf4eἡ…δύναμις τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ νόμος2the power of sin is the lawGods law that was passed down by Moses defines sin and shows us how we sin before God.
11061CO1557ztj6τῷ διδόντι ἡμῖν τὸ νῖκος1gives us the victory“who has defeated death for us”
11071CO1558k4c40Connecting Statement:Paul wants believers, while they work for the Lord, to remember the changed, resurrected bodies that God is going to give them.
11081CO1558j1plfigs-metaphorἑδραῖοι γίνεσθε, ἀμετακίνητοι1be steadfast and immovablePaul speaks of someone who lets nothing stop him from carrying out his decisions as if he could not be physically moved. Alternate translation: “be determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11091CO1558zn8ffigs-metaphorπερισσεύοντες ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου πάντοτε1Always abound in the work of the LordPaul speaks of efforts made in working for the Lord as if they were objects that a person could acquire more of. Alternate translation: “Always work for the Lord faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11101CO16introabcj0# 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Preparation for his coming<br><br>Paul gave practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He told them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hoped to come and spend the winter with them. He told them to help Timothy when he came. He had hoped Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also told them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sent his greetings to everyone.
11111CO161zh6u0Connecting Statement:In his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem. He reminds them that Timothy will come to them before he goes to Paul.
11121CO161yer5εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους1for the saintsPaul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea.
11131CO161kh6hὥσπερ διέταξα1as I directed“as I gave specific instructions to”
11141CO162h8n9θησαυρίζων1storing upThis could mean: (1) “keep it at home.” (2) “leave it with the church.”
11151CO162wc3wἵνα μὴ ὅταν ἔλθω, τότε λογεῖαι γίνωνται1so that there will be no collections when I come“so that you will not have to collect more money while I am with you”
11161CO163yj6cοὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε1whomever you approvePaul is telling the church to choose some of their own people to take their offering to Jerusalem. “whomever you choose” or “the people you appoint”
11171CO163j612δι’ ἐπιστολῶν…πέμψω1I will send with lettersThis could mean: (1) Paul will send with letters that he will write. (2) Paul will send with letters that they will write.
11181CO166w94kὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε, οὗ ἐὰν πορεύωμαι1you may help me on my way, wherever I goThis means the Corinthians might give Paul money or other things he needs so that he and his ministry team could continue to travel.
11191CO167xr88figs-litotesοὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἄρτι ἐν παρόδῳ ἰδεῖν1I do not wish to see you nowPaul is stating that he wants to visit for a long time later, not just for a short time soon. You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want to spend a longer time with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
11201CO168qkw9τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς1PentecostPaul would stay in Ephesus until the festival of **Pentecost**, which came in May or June, 50 days after Passover. He would then travel through Macedonia, and later try to arrive in Corinth before winter started in November.
11211CO169fyj3figs-metaphorθύρα…ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής1a wide door has openedPaul speaks of the opportunity God has given him to win people to the gospel as if it were a **door** that God had opened so he could walk through it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11221CO1610p6vbβλέπετε ἵνα ἀφόβως γένηται πρὸς ὑμᾶς1see that he is with you unafraid“see that he has no cause to fear being with you”
11231CO1611f4mwμή τις…αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ1Let no one despise himBecause Timothy was much younger than Paul, sometimes he was not shown the respect he deserved as a minister of the gospel.
11241CO1612is6jfigs-exclusiveἈπολλῶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ1our brother ApollosSome languages such as English require the word **our** for clarity. If added, **you** would refer to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
11251CO1613p2lafigs-parallelismγρηγορεῖτε, στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει, ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε1Stay alert; stand firm in the faith; act like men; be strongPaul is describing what he wants the Corinthians to do as if he was giving four commands to soldiers in war. These four commands mean almost the same thing and are used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
11261CO1613ng8nfigs-metaphorγρηγορεῖτε1Stay alertPaul speaks of people being aware of what is happening as if they were guards keeping watch over a city or vineyard. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “Be careful whom you trust” or “Watch out for danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11271CO1613uys8figs-metaphorστήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει1stand firm in the faithPaul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. This could mean: (1) they should keep strongly believing what Paul and his companions have taught them. (2) they should keep strongly trusting in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11281CO1613a3fsfigs-metaphorἀνδρίζεσθε1act like menIn the society in which Paul and his audience lived, men usually provided for families by doing the heavy work and fighting against invaders. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “be responsible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11291CO1614rij5πάντα ὑμῶν ἐν ἀγάπῃ γινέσθω1Let all that you do be done in love“Everything you do, you should do because you love people” or “Everything you do, you should do because you love God”
11301CO1615fy4e0Connecting Statement:Paul begins to close his letter and sends greetings from other churches, as well as from Prisca, Aquila, and Paul himself.
11311CO1615asp2translate-namesτὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ1the household of Stephanas**Stephanas** was one of the first believers in the church at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11321CO1615na2ptranslate-namesἈχαΐας1Achaia**Achaia** is the name of a province in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11331CO1617iju8Στεφανᾶ, καὶ Φορτουνάτου, καὶ Ἀχαϊκοῦ1Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus**Stephanas and Fortunatus** were either some of the first Corinthian believers or church elders who were co-workers with Paul.
11341CO1617e79ztranslate-namesΣτεφανᾶ, καὶ Φορτουνάτου, καὶ Ἀχαϊκοῦ1Stephanas, and Fortunatus, and Achaicus**Stephanas and Fortunatus** are mens names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11351CO1617an3eτὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα οὗτοι ἀνεπλήρωσαν1They have made up for your absence“they made up for the fact that you were not here”
11361CO1618f3kgἀνέπαυσαν γὰρ τὸ ἐμὸν πνεῦμα1For they have refreshed my spiritPaul is saying he was encouraged by their visit.
11371CO1621izu6ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου1I, Paul, write this with my own handPaul was making it clear that the instructions in this letter are from him, even though one of his co-laborers wrote what Paul was saying in the rest of the letter. Paul wrote this last part with his **own hand**.
11381CO1622c1kxἤτω ἀνάθεμα1may he be accursed“may God curse him.” See how **accursed** was translated in [1 Corinthians 12:3](../12/03.md).